288113969-01gb adr2500extra

STM-16 ADD-DROP MULTIPLEXER

MULTIPLEXEUR ADD-DROP STM-16

ADR2500 eXtra

Installation and User GuideGuide d'Installation et d'Utilisation

288 113 969-01

November 2006 IssueEdition Novembre 2006

Installation and User Guide / Guide d'Installation et d'Utilisation – 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibitedDocument Sagem Communication Reproduction et divulgation interdites

Page 0-2

LIST OF CHANGESREPERTOIRE DES MISES A JOUR

(A new edition replaces any previous versions)(Une nouvelle édition annule et remplace la précédente)

No/N° Date/Date Change description/Description de la mise à jour

Page/Page

288 054 178-01 June 2004Juin 2004

Creation of original user guide/Création du document à l'édition originale

All pages/Toutes pages

288 054 178-02 January 2005

Janvier 2005

Addition of SWITCH 32 VC4 HO/LO card/ DCC Transparency / GFP150 eXtra

cardAjout carte SWITCH 32 VC4 HO/LO /

Aboutement DCC / carte GFP150 eXtra


288 054 178-03 June 2005

Juin 2005

3E3DS3FA card / TCM function /New data features on GFP /

New alarms on GIG-E and GFPCarte 3E3DS3FA / Fonction TCM /Nouvelles fonctions data sur GFP /

Nouvelles alarmes sur GIG-E et GFP


288 054 178-04 January 2006

Janvier 2006

Addition of Pause mode (flow control)New optical Booster

Ajout mode Pause (contrôle de flux)Nouvel Ampli optique

All page s/Toutes pages

288 113 969-01 November 2006

November 2006

New SDH alarmsAddition of VCG_RDI alarmAddition of following cards :

- STM1-SFP- STM4-SFP- STM16-SFP

-xGE-DM- 2GE-DM-SFP

- 63E1FA

Nouvelles alarmes SDHAjout alarme VCG_RDI

Ajout des cartes suivantes :- STM1-SFP- STM4-SFP- STM16-SFP

- xGE-DM- 2GE-DM-SFP

- 63E1FA

All pages /

Toutes pages

Installation and User Guide- 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A0-1

STM-16 ADD-DROP MULTIPLEXER

ADR2500 eXtra

Installation and User Guide

288 113 969-01

November 2006 Issue

Installation and User Guide- 288 113 969-01Page A0-2 Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

PORTS SECURITY LEVELS

ADR2500 eXtra shelf ports security levels

Front panel connectors Function Safety levelLTU3E3DS3 cardTR and REC G703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic access SELVLTU21E120 cardE1 INPUT andE1 OUTPUT

G703 120 Ω 2 Mbit/s traffic access SELV

LTU21E75 cardE1 INPUT andE1 OUTPUT


3E3DS3FA cardTR and REC G703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic access SELV

63E1FA cardE1 INPUT andE1 OUTPUT


CCU-2G cardPOWER/ALM Access to station power supply and alarms SELV

LOOPS Access to signaling and dry loops SELV

SYNC Access to G.703 2 MHz synchronization SELV

CTRL-2G cardETH Access to remote management via Ethernet network SELV

COMM Access to local management via VT100 console or aPC

SELV

Optical interface cardsTR and REC G.957 STM-n Optical access

(n=1, 4 or 16)Class 1 laser

Harmless

4ERE cardTR and REC G703 STM-1 Electrical access SELVAUX cardEOW and AUX Engineering Order Wire SELV

GIG-E cardTR et REC Optical Gigabit Ethernet Access Class 1 laser

Harmless

RS232 Maintenance Access SELV

xGE-DM cardTR et REC Optical Gigabit Ethernet Access Class 1 laser

Harmless

GFP150 eXtra cardETH IEEE802.3 10/100 Base TX Ethernet / Fast Ethernet

AccessSELV


The ADR2500 eXtra shelf must only be mounted in racks with lower partclosed or equipped with a class V1 or HF1 air filter (minimum) or restingon a non-inflammable floor.

Safe grounding obligation

This equipment must only be installed by qualified personnel. The protective ground terminalmust be connected to a safe grounding system with resistance of Z < 5 ohms to fulfil technicalcompliance.

Handling precautionUse of an electrostatic bracelet is mandatory for all interventions inside theequipment.

The logo , marked on certain cards, puts in guard against burns which canbe caused by an important elevation of the temperature of the radiator.


ENVIRONMENT

Preservation of the environment as part of a sustainable development logic is an essential concern ofSagem Communication. The desire of Sagem Communication is to operate systems observing theenvironment and consequently it has decided to integrate environmental performances in the life cycleof its products, from manufacturing to commissioning, use and elimination.

PACKAGINGThe presence of the logo (green dot) means that a contribution is paid to an approvednational organisation to improve packaging recovery and recycling infrastructures.

To facilitate recycling, please respect the sorting rules set up locally for this kind of waste.

BATTERIESIf your product contains batteries, they must be disposed of at appropriate collection points.

THE PRODUCTThe crossed-out waste bin stuck on the product (or on its accessories) means that theproduct belongs to the family of electrical and electronic equipment.

In this respect, the European regulations ask you to dispose of it selectively :• At sales points in the event of the purchase of similar equipment.• At the collection points made available to you locally (drop-off centre, selective

collection, etc.).

In this way you can participate in the re-use and upgrading of Electrical and Electronic EquipmentWaste, which can have an effect on the environment and human health.


TABLE OF CONTENTS

CHANGE LIST ..................................................................................................................................... 0-2

SECTION A - Installation and User Guide ........................A0-1 to AC-6PORTS SECURITY LEVELS.............................................................................................................A0-2

ENVIRONMENT .................................................................................................................................A0-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS..................................................................................................... A0-5 to A0-11

1 INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 - GENERAL INFORMATION .............................................................................................................. 1-11.2 - INSTALLATION OF THE SHELF........................................................................................................ 1-41.3 - CONNECTION OF ACCESS POINTS............................................................................................... 1-11

1.3.1 - Connection to LTU21E1 or LTU21E75 cards .................................................................. 1-121.3.2 - Connection to LTU3E3DS3 card...................................................................................... 1-141.3.3 - Connection to CCU-2G card ............................................................................................ 1-14

1.3.3.1 - "POWER/ALM" connector ........................................................................................................ 1-151.3.3.2 - Remote signaling, remote control and station alarms access : ”LOOPS"................................. 1-161.3.3.3 - 2 MHz G.703 sync access : "SYNC" ........................................................................................ 1-17

1.3.4 - Connection to CTRL-2G card .......................................................................................... 1-181.3.4.1 - Management access : "COMM" connector............................................................................... 1-181.3.4.2 - Management access : "ETH" connector ................................................................................... 1-19

1.3.5 - Connection to AUX cards................................................................................................. 1-211.3.6 - Connection to 3E3DS3FA card........................................................................................ 1-221.3.7 - Connection to 63E1FA card............................................................................................. 1-23- Connection of optical STM-n access points.............................................................................. 1-231.3.9 - Connection of electrical STM-1 access points................................................................. 1-271.3.10 - Connection to GIG-E cards............................................................................................ 1-27

1.3.10.1 - Gigabit Ethernet access points ............................................................................................... 1-281.3.10.2 - Maintenance access : "RS232" connector.............................................................................. 1-28

1.3.11- Connection to xGE-DM cards ......................................................................................... 1-291.3.12 - Connection to GFP150 eXtra card................................................................................. 1-30

1.4 - SHELF WITHOUT PDH PROTECTION ............................................................................................. 1-31

2 COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION......................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 - COMMISSIONING ......................................................................................................................... 2-12.1.1 - Required configuration....................................................................................................... 2-12.1.2 - Procedure........................................................................................................................... 2-32.1.3 - Description of communication function .............................................................................. 2-42.1.4 - Description of DCC transparency function......................................................................... 2-62.1.5 - Defining parameters for IP address and Ethernet port ...................................................... 2-72.1.6 - Using the Web browser.................................................................................................... 2-11

2.1.6.1 - Browser configuration............................................................................................................... 2-112.1.6.2 - Initial commissioning ................................................................................................................ 2-122.1.6.3 - Menus tree ............................................................................................................................... 2-122.1.6.4 - Presentation of the Graphical User Interface............................................................................ 2-14


2.2 - OPERATION .............................................................................................................................. 2-172.2.1 - Functional description ...................................................................................................... 2-172.2.2 - General information ......................................................................................................... 2-172.2.3 - Operation parameters ...................................................................................................... 2-18

2.2.3.1 - Network Configuration Parameters........................................................................................... 2-192.2.3.2 - Equipment Configuration Parameters....................................................................................... 2-222.2.3.3 - Maintenance commands and operations.................................................................................. 2-422.2.3.4 - Alarm processing...................................................................................................................... 2-42

2.2.4 - Performance processing .................................................................................................. 2-552.2.5 - Optical Supervision .......................................................................................................... 2-562.2.6 - Synchronization................................................................................................................ 2-572.2.7 - Loops Management ......................................................................................................... 2-592.2.8 - MS-SPRing protection on LINE interfaces....................................................................... 2-61

2.2.8.1 - Introduction............................................................................................................................... 2-612.2.8.2 - Principle.................................................................................................................................... 2-612.2.8.3 - Configuration rules relative to 2-fibers MS-SPRing protection.................................................. 2-62

2.2.9 - TCM Function................................................................................................................... 2-662.2.9.1 - TCM Points at Equipment Level ............................................................................................... 2-662.2.9.2 - TCM VC4 Points Management by http ..................................................................................... 2-70

2.2.10 - Quality of service for VC4nv GigaEthernet .................................................................... 2-722.2.10.1 - Classification criteria............................................................................................................... 2-722.2.10.2 - Bandwidth management......................................................................................................... 2-752.2.10.3 - Congestion management in emission on the WAN ................................................................ 2-752.2.10.4 - Congestion management in reception WAN........................................................................... 2-77

2.3 - CARDS PROTECTION ................................................................................................................. 2-782.3.1 - PDH cards protection....................................................................................................... 2-782.3.2 - SWITCH HO/LO card protection...................................................................................... 2-782.3.3 - PSU card protection......................................................................................................... 2-79

2.4 - SUB-ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES............................................................................. 2-792.4.1 - Replacement of an Interface card.................................................................................... 2-792.4.2 - Replacement of a SWITCH HO/LO card ......................................................................... 2-802.4.3 - Replacement of a PSU module........................................................................................ 2-802.4.4 - Replacement of a CTRL-2G card .................................................................................... 2-812.4.5 - Replacement of a CCU-2G card ...................................................................................... 2-822.4.6 - Replacement of FAN-2G module..................................................................................... 2-822.4.7 - Preventive maintenance .................................................................................................. 2-82

3 SPARE PARTS AND CABLES .................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1 - LIST OF NO ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS ................................................................................ 3-13.2 - LIST OF ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS ..................................................................................... 3-33.3 - LIST OF AVAILABLE CABLES ....................................................................................................... 3-4

4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS .............................................................................................. 4-1

5 START-UP GUIDE........................................................................................................................ 5-1

5.1 - INSTALLING THE EQUIPMENT ........................................................................................................ 5-15.2 - CONNECTING TO AN ADR2500 EXTRA......................................................................................... 5-25.3 - CONFIGURING A PPP PORT......................................................................................................... 5-95.4 - VIEWING THE ROUTING CONFIGURATION ..................................................................................... 5-105.5 - BUILDING A POINT-TO-POINT LINK............................................................................................... 5-115.6 - BUILDING A BUS LINK ................................................................................................................. 5-125.7 - BUILDING A RING....................................................................................................................... 5-135.8 - MANAGING EQUIPMENT THROUGH THE NETWORK OF A DIFFERENT SUPPLIER ................................ 5-14


6 DEGRADED MODE...................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 - DEFINITION................................................................................................................................. 6-16.2 - CHARACTERIZATION.................................................................................................................... 6-26.3 - POSSIBLE CAUSES ...................................................................................................................... 6-26.4 - OPERATOR ACTIONS................................................................................................................... 6-46.5 - DEGRADED MODE SWITCH WARNING ............................................................................................ 6-86.6 - ACTIONS TO REALIZE ACCORDING TO CASES................................................................................. 6-9

7 GFP150 EXTRA CARD ................................................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 - GFP150 EXTRA CARD AND SERVICES PRESENTATION.................................................................. 7-17.2 - CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATIONS OF THE GFP150 EXTRA CARDS............................................ 7-3

7.2.1 - GFP150 eXtra card setup .................................................................................................. 7-37.2.2 - Create a LAN interconnection............................................................................................ 7-3

7.2.2.1 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : “EPLine” service ............................................................. 7-37.2.2.2 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : “EVPLine” service (aggregation)..................................... 7-97.2.2.3 - “Hub and Spoke” interconnection: “EPLAN” service................................................................. 7-137.2.2.4 - Bus interconnection : service “EPLAN”..................................................................................... 7-187.2.2.5 - “ Bus interconnection : service “EVPLAN” ................................................................................ 7-22

7.2.3 - Implementation of the OAM-CC function (Operation Administration Maintenance -Continuity Check) on the GFP150 eXtra card............................................................................. 7-237.2.4 - Using Quality of Service features of GFP150 eXtra card ................................................ 7-24

7.2.4.1 - QoS functions of the GFP150 eXtra card ................................................................................. 7-247.2.4.2 - Configuring the QoS features ................................................................................................... 7-26

7.2.5 - Using the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150 eXtra card .......................... 7-307.2.5.1 - Description of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150 eXtra card ....................... 7-307.2.5.2 - MSTP Licence Activation on a GFP150 eXtra card.................................................................. 7-327.2.5.3 - Example of MSTP configuration ............................................................................................... 7-33

7.2.6 - Using LCAS on the GFP150 eXtra card .......................................................................... 7-377.2.6.1 - Description of LCAS ................................................................................................................. 7-377.2.6.2 - Example of LCAS configuration................................................................................................ 7-37

7.3 - A FEW RULES FOR SET-UP ......................................................................................................... 7-407.3.1 - Various configuration rules .............................................................................................. 7-407.3.2 - QoS configuration rules ................................................................................................... 7-40

7.4 - APPLICATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 7-407.4.1 - Meshed networks............................................................................................................. 7-407.4.2 - Protection of channels ..................................................................................................... 7-407.4.3 - Degraded mode ............................................................................................................... 7-41

7.5 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS .................................................................................................. 7-417.5.1 - Main characteristics ......................................................................................................... 7-417.5.2 - Ethernet rate / VCG rate .................................................................................................. 7-427.5.3 - Number of VC12 in a VCG............................................................................................... 7-437.5.4 - Number of VC3 in a VCG................................................................................................. 7-43

A CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN....................................................A-1

A.1 - PRELIMINARY REMARKS ..............................................................................................................A-1A.2 - IP ADDRESSING..........................................................................................................................A-2A.3 - ADDRESSING PLAN .....................................................................................................................A-3A.4 - USE OF STATIC TABLES ...............................................................................................................A-3A.5 - USE OF RIP ROUTING DAEMON ...................................................................................................A-5A.6 - USE OF OSPF ROUTING DAEMON................................................................................................A-6


B OPTICAL BOOSTER....................................................................................................................B-1

B.1 - INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................B-1B.1.1 - Access security level .........................................................................................................B-1B.1.2 - General information ...........................................................................................................B-1B.1.3 - Installation..........................................................................................................................B-2B.1.4 - Connection of access points..............................................................................................B-2

B.1.4.1 - Optical ports ...............................................................................................................................B-2B.1.4.2 - Power port..................................................................................................................................B-3B.1.4.3 - Alarm loops ................................................................................................................................B-4

B.2 - OPERATION ............................................................................................................................B-4B.2.1 - General information ...........................................................................................................B-4B.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation ..............................................................................B-4B.2.3 - Display and directions for use ...........................................................................................B-5B.2.4 - Alarm processing...............................................................................................................B-5

B.3 - SPARE PART AND CABLES...................................................................................................B-6B.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS..........................................................................................B-7

C MUX 10000 A/T.............................................................................................................................C-1

C.1 - INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................C-1C.1.1 - General information...........................................................................................................C-1C.1.2 - Installation .........................................................................................................................C-2C.1.3 - Connection of access points .............................................................................................C-3

C.2 - OPERATION............................................................................................................................C-3C.2.1 - General information...........................................................................................................C-3C.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation..............................................................................C-4C.2.3 - Multiplexing – demultiplexing function specification..........................................................C-4C.2.4 - Optical power budget ........................................................................................................C-5

C.3 - SPARE PARTS AND CABLES ................................................................................................C-5C.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS..........................................................................................C-6

SECTION B - Guide d'installation et d'utilisation.............B0-1 to BC-6


LIST OF FIGURES

Figure 1-1 - Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in 19" rack................................................................ 1-5Figure 1-2 - Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in ETSI rack ............................................................. 1-6Figure 1-3 - ADR2500 eXtra equipped shelf ........................................................................................ 1-7Figure 1-4 - Front panel of LTU21E120 card ..................................................................................... 1-12Figure 1-5 - Front panel of LTU3E3DS3 card .................................................................................... 1-14Figure 1-6 - Front panel of CCU-2G card........................................................................................... 1-14Figure 1-7 - «POWER/ALM » power supply cable............................................................................. 1-16Figure 1-8 - Front panel of CTRL-2G card ......................................................................................... 1-18Figure 1-9 - « Comm » connection cable ........................................................................................... 1-19Figure 1-10 - « Straight-through Ethernet » cable.............................................................................. 1-20Figure 1-11 - « Cross-over Ethernet » cable ..................................................................................... 1-20Figure 1-12 - Front panel of AUX card ............................................................................................... 1-21Figure 1-13 - « AUX/EOW » connection cable................................................................................... 1-21Figure 1-14 - Front panel of 3E3DS3FA card..................................................................................... 1-22Figure 1-15 - Front panel of 63E1FA card.......................................................................................... 1-23Figure 1-16 - Front panel of STM-1 interface card............................................................................. 1-23Figure 1-17 - Front panel of STM-4 interface card............................................................................. 1-24Figure 1-18 - Front panel of STM-16 interface card........................................................................... 1-24Figure 1-19 - Front panel of 4ERE interface card .............................................................................. 1-27Figure 1-20 - Front panel of GIG-E interface card.............................................................................. 1-27Figure 1-21 - Front panel of 2GE-DM interface card.......................................................................... 1-29Figure 1-22 - Front panel of GFP150 eXtra card................................................................................ 1-30

Figure 2-1 - Commissioning process for an ADR2500 eXtra network ................................................. 2-2Figure 2-2 - Communication function on an ADR2500 eXtra............................................................... 2-4Figure 2-3 - Example of communication on an ADR2500 eXtra, ADR 2500c, ADR155c and other

equipment network ........................................................................................................................ 2-5Figure 2-4 - Menus tree ...................................................................................................................... 2-13Figure 2-5 - «Shelf view » screen of web browser ............................................................................. 2-14Figure 2-6 - Synchronization using 2 MHz external synchronization input (T3)................................. 2-58Figure 2-7 - Synchronization using a synchronous tributary access.................................................. 2-58Figure 2-8 - Remote loopback function (collection of alarms on a Central Site)............................... 2-60Figure 2-9 - Example of a protected ring............................................................................................ 2-61Figure 2-10 - Topological map of a ring ............................................................................................. 2-63Figure 2-11 - Example of incoming and outgoing traffic of a ring....................................................... 2-63Figure 2-12 - TC EndPoints X/Y......................................................................................................... 2-67Figure 2-13 - TC EndPoints X/Y - Source facing Sink ....................................................................... 2-67Figure 2-14 - TC EndPoints X/Y - Source not facing Sink ................................................................. 2-68Figure 2-15 - TC EndPoints X/Y – Source and Sink back to back..................................................... 2-68Figure 2-16 - TC Monitoring Point Z located between TC EndPoint X and TC EndPoint Y .............. 2-69


Figure 7-1- Hardware design of the card.............................................................................................. 7-2Figure 7-2 - EPLine service .................................................................................................................. 7-3Figure 7-3 - Configuring the Ethernet interface.................................................................................... 7-4Figure 7-4 - Configuring the VCG (1) ................................................................................................... 7-6Figure 7-5 - Configuring the VCG (2) ................................................................................................... 7-6Figure 7-6 - Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1).................................................................................. 7-7Figure 7-7 - Configuring the Ethernet Switch (2).................................................................................. 7-7Figure 7-8 - Configuring the SDH Cross Connects .............................................................................. 7-8Figure 7-9 - Connectivity check............................................................................................................ 7-9Figure 7-10 - Service EVPLine........................................................................................................... 7-10Figure 7-11 - Configuring the VCG (1) ............................................................................................... 7-10Figure 7-12 - Configuring the VCG (2) ............................................................................................... 7-11Figure 7-13 - Configuring the Ethernet Switch .................................................................................. 7-12Figure 7-14 - Configuring the SDH Cross Connects .......................................................................... 7-12Figure 7-15 - EPLAN service.............................................................................................................. 7-13Figure 7-16 - Configuring the Ethernet interface................................................................................ 7-14Figure 7-17 - Configuring the VCG (1) ............................................................................................... 7-15Figure 7-18 - Configuring the VCG (2) ............................................................................................... 7-15Figure 7-19 - Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1).............................................................................. 7-16Figure 7-20 - Configuring the Ethernet Switch (2).............................................................................. 7-16Figure 7-21 - EPLAN Service - "bus" mode ....................................................................................... 7-18Figure 7-22 - Configuring the VCG (1) ............................................................................................... 7-19Figure 7-23 - Configuring the VCG (2) ............................................................................................... 7-19Figure 7-24 - Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1).............................................................................. 7-20Figure 7-25 - Configuring the Ethernet Switch (2).............................................................................. 7-20Figure 7-26 - EVPLAN Service - "bus" mode ..................................................................................... 7-22Figure 7-27 - Example of OAM utilization........................................................................................... 7-23Figure 7-28 - QoS architecture........................................................................................................... 7-24Figure 7-29 - Traffic profile ................................................................................................................. 7-25Figure 7-30 - Configuring a srTCM profile.......................................................................................... 7-27Figure 7-31 - Configuring a trTCM profile........................................................................................... 7-27Figure 7-32 - Reading Traffic Classes parameters ............................................................................ 7-28Figure 7-33 - Regulating Traffic Classes SP parameters................................................................... 7-28Figure 7-34 - SLA compliance counters ............................................................................................. 7-29Figure 7-35 - VMAN Port counters ..................................................................................................... 7-29Figure 7-36 - MSTP port types ........................................................................................................... 7-31Figure 7-37 - MSTP Licence Activation............................................................................................. 7-32Figure 7-38 - Example of MSTP configuration ................................................................................... 7-33Figure 7-39 - Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (1) ................................................... 7-34Figure 7-40 - Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (2) ................................................... 7-35Figure 7-41 - MSTI Checking (1)....................................................................................................... 7-36Figure 7-42 - MSTI Checking (2)....................................................................................................... 7-36Figure 7-43 - Configuring the VCG (LCAS) (1) .................................................................................. 7-38Figure 7-44 - Configuring the VCG (LCAS) (2) .................................................................................. 7-38Figure 7-45 - Configuring the SDH cross-connects (LCAS)............................................................... 7-39

Figure A-1 - IP protocol stack...............................................................................................................A-1Figure A-2 - Example TMN architecture...............................................................................................A-4

Figure B-1 - Optical booster – Installation in rack ................................................................................B-2Figure B-2 - Optical booster – Optical access points ...........................................................................B-2

Figure C-1 - MUX10000T Block diagram (1/2 MUX 10000A) ..............................................................C-1Figure C-2 - MUX 10000 T – Front panel.............................................................................................C-2Figure C-3 - MUX 10000 A – Front panel.............................................................................................C-2Figure C-4 - MUX 10000 A – Installation in 19" rack............................................................................C-2Figure C-5 - MUX 10000 A or T – Optical access points .....................................................................C-3


LIST OF TABLES

Table 1-1 - Designation of ADR2500 eXtra slots ................................................................................. 1-8Table 1-2 - Characteristics of single mode interfaces ........................................................................ 1-25Table 1-3 - Characteristics of multimode interface............................................................................. 1-26Table 1-4 - Characteristics of GigaEthernet interface ........................................................................ 1-28Table 1-5 - Characteristics of GigaEthernet interface ........................................................................ 1-29

Table 2-1 - Minimum configuration for operation PC ........................................................................... 2-1Table 2-2 - Functional blocks of ADR2500 eXtra............................................................................... 2-17Tables 2-3 to 2-5 - Network configuration parameters....................................................................... 2-19Tables 2-6 to 2-25 - Equipment configuration parameters................................................................. 2-22Table 2-26 - Maintenance commands and operations....................................................................... 2-42Table 2-27 - Specific indicator LEDs to CTRL-2G card ..................................................................... 2-42Table 2-28 - « TRAFFIC » indicator LEDs on PDH, STM, GIG-E, xGE-DM, GFP150 eXtra and

SWITCH HO/LO cards ................................................................................................................ 2-43Table 2-29 - « STATUS » indicator LEDs on all cards except PSU and FAN-2G ............................. 2-43Table 2-30 - « STATUS » indicator LEDs on PSU cards ................................................................... 2-43Table 2-31 - Specific indicator LEDs to GFP150 eXtra card.............................................................. 2-43Table 2-32 - Pushbuttons ................................................................................................................... 2-44Tables 2-33 to 2-37 - Alarms and severity levels ............................................................................... 2-45Table 2-38 - Associated informations to card defective alarm ........................................................... 2-50Table 2-39 - Correlation of STM-n faults ............................................................................................ 2-51Table 2-40 - Correlation of MSP faults ............................................................................................... 2-51Table 2-41 - Correlation of MS-SPRing faults .................................................................................... 2-51Table 2-42 - Correlation of HPOM/HPT faults from SDH and xGE-DM cards ................................... 2-52Table 2-43 - Correlation of HPT faults from GIG-E cards ................................................................. 2-52Table 2-44 - Correlation of HPA/LPOM/LPT faults ........................................................................... 2-53Table 2-45 - Correlation of 2, 34, 45 Mbit/s ports faults ..................................................................... 2-53Table 2-46 - Correlation of VCG faults from GFP150 eXtra, GIG-E and xGE-DM cards................... 2-54

Tables 3-1 to 3-2 - List of no rohs ADR2500 eXtra items .................................................................... 3-1Table 3-3 - List of rohs ADR2500 eXtra items ..................................................................................... 3-3Table 3-4 - List of rohs optical modules of ADR2500 eXtra ................................................................. 3-4Tables 3-5 to 3-7 - List of available cables........................................................................................... 3-4

Tables 4-1 to 4-3 - Technical characteristics of ADR2500 eXtra ......................................................... 4-1

Tables 6-1 to 6-5 - Actions to realize according to cases .................................................................... 6-9

Table B-1 - Access security level .........................................................................................................B-1Table B-2 - Failure indication definition ................................................................................................B-5Table B-3 - List of items........................................................................................................................B-6Table B-4 - List of available cables ......................................................................................................B-6Table B-5 - Technical characteristics ...................................................................................................B-7

Table C-1 - MUX/DEMUX Specification ...............................................................................................C-4Table C-2 - Optical power budget ........................................................................................................C-5Table C-3 - List of items .......................................................................................................................C-5Table C-4 - List of available cables ......................................................................................................C-6Table C-5 - Technical Characteristics ..................................................................................................C-6

1 - INSTALLATION

Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01 Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A1-1

1 INSTALLATION

1.1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

The ADR2500 eXtra (Add-Drop multiplexer 2500 Mbit/s) is an STM-16 optical add-dropmultiplexer used to build STM-16 point-to-point links, STM-16 rings or meshed networks withSNC path protection or MSP protection or MS-SPRing protection (line) to fulfil transportof 2 Mbit/s, 34/45 Mbit/s, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16 links, of 10/100 Base TX Fast Ethernet data, ofgigabit Ethernet data….

The ADR2500 eXtra offers a cross-connection with VC4-16c, VC4-4c, VC4, VC3, VC12granularity, called "SWITCH HO/LO" with 64x64 VC4 (or 32x32 VC4), 192x192 VC3 (or 96x96VC3) and/or 4032x4032 VC12 (or 2016x2016 VC12) capacity, unidirectional or bi-directional.

From P2.4 release, the STM-n and xGE-DM cards offer extractable interfaces SFP (Small FormFactor Pluggable), also integrating DDM (DIGITAL Diagnostic Monitoring) function.

On STM-16 side, the ADR2500 eXtra allows regeneration sections of up to 60 km at 1310 nm and100 km at 1550 nm ; if it is associated to an optical booster, via an U16.2 card, the section canreach 150 km.

The association with a MUX 10000 Unit allows an optical multiplexing - demultiplexing function offour STM-16 signals from four L16.2+ cards with wavelength in the 200 GHz grid (1,6 nm).

The ADR2500 eXtra can optionally include the protection of power supply, of switching matrixfunction and of PDH cards.

The ADR2500 eXtra can be used as :

• Terminal Multiplexer with maximum capacity of 1 STM-16 or 4 STM-4 or 16 STM-1 or 378E1 tributaries (with 63E1FA card) or 18 E3/DS3 tributaries (with E3DS3FA card) and withtributary and line protection MSP 1+1,

• Pseudo-repeater, with capacity to regenerate 1 or 2 STM-16 lines,

• STM-16 add/drop Multiplexer with maximum capacity of 2 STM-16 line and of 378 E1tributaries (with 63E1FA card) or 18 E3/DS3 tributaries (with E3DS3FA card) or 32 STM-1 or8 STM-4 or 2 STM-16 tributaries,

• STM-4 add/drop Multiplexer with maximum capacity of 2 STM-4 line and of 378 E1tributaries (with 63E1FA card) or 18 E3/DS3 tributaries (with E3DS3FA card) or 8 STM-1 or2 STM-4 tributaries.

• LAN over VC12 or VC3 interconnection point through the GFP150 eXtra cardThe GFP150 eXtra data traffic is compatible with those of the GFP150 and 4E/FE cards ofthe ADR155X.

• Gigabit Ethernet over SDH transport through the GIG-E or xGE-DM cards.

The ADR2500 eXtra interworks with equipment of the synchronous digital hierarchy complyingwith recommendations G.707, G.783 and G.7041 of the ITU-T.

1 - INSTALLATION

Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Page A1-2 Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

This equipment can be managed :

• by a local terminal with VT100 emulation required on commissioning for communicationparameter configuration ("COMM" access),

• by an HTTP server for local or remote interactive operation using a Web Browser,

• remotely, by means of an SNMP protocol via an IONOS NMS network manager ; usingSNMP protocol also allows the supervision of the whole networkThe connection of this manager to the management network is performed via the Ethernetaccess ("ETH") of the CTRL-2G management card.The management network is made of the Ethernet access ("ETH"), of the DCC (D1-D3 andD4-D6), of the STM-16 line and STM-n tributaries, of the 2 VC12 that can be used formanagement.The VC12 used for management of the ADR2500 eXtra are compatible with those of theADR 155c (from P4.1-ae release), those of the ADR155CPE and those of theADR2500c P3.

The ADR2500 eXtra is mounted in a 19" or ETSI rack.

The ADR2500 eXtra is made of :

• one 14U shelf equipped with a back panel,

• one to twelve LTU interface cards :

one to twelve LTU21E120 or LTU21E75 cards dedicated by group of 3 to the tributaryPDH 63E1 cards. Each LTU includes the connectors for 21x2 Mbit/s ports.

one to four LTU3E3DS3 cards dedicated to the tributary PDH 3E3DS3 cards. EachLTU includes the connectors for 3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s ports.

• One or two 48 VDC Power Supply Unit cards (PSU-160 or PSU-2G).Only one PSU card is required if the equipment receives a SW 32 HO/LO card, two PSUcards are mandatory if the equipment receives a SWITCH HO/LO card A second or third card can be inserted in the shelf as automatic 1:1 or 1:2 protectionThe utilization of the PSU-2G card is possible in order to arrange an unique maintenanceshare between ADR 2500c and ADR2500 eXtra.

• one Common Connecting Unit card (CCU-2G) for the power supply, the remote signaling,the station remote controls and alarms and the synchronization signals,

• one Control Unit card (CTRL-2G),

• two Auxiliary Channels cards (AUX),

• one SWITCH HO/LO card enabling VC4-16c, VC4-4c, VC4, VC3, VC12 granularity,- either one SWITCH HO/LO card with 64 VC4 max switching- either one SW 32 HO/LO card with 32 VC4 max switchingA second card, inevitably of the same type that the first, can be inserted in the shelf asautomatic or manual 1:1 protection.

1 - INSTALLATION


• one to ten interface cards as required :

one to four tributary PDH 63E1 cards allowing 63 VC12 connections.Each card is associated to a LTU21E1 group from 1 to 3.A fifth card can be inserted in the shelf as automatic or manual 1:4 max protection

one to six tributary PDH 63E1FA cards allowing 63 VC12 connectionsThis card regroups the functions of LTU interface and tributary ; it includes theconnectors for 63x2 Mbit/s ports ; it allows to increase the add/drop capacity of PDHaccess points.This card cannot be protected nor to be used in protection

one to four tributary PDH 3E3DS3 cards allowing 3 VC3 connections.Each card is associated to a LTU3E3DS3.A fifth card can be inserted in the shelf as automatic or manual 1:4 max protection

one to six tributary PDH 3E3DS3FA cards allowing 3 VC3 connectionsThis card regroups the functions of LTU interface and tributary ; it includes theconnectors for 3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s ports ; it allows to increase the add/drop capacity ofPDH access pointsThis card cannot be protected nor to be used in protection

one to eight cards with 1 to 4 optical STM-1 access points enabling on each accessone VC4 connection or 3 VC3 connections or 63 VC12 connections.

one to eight 4ERE cards with 4 electrical STM-1 access points enabling on eachaccess one VC4 connection or 3 VC3 connections or 63 VC12 connections.

one to ten cards with one optical STM-4 access enabling one VC4-4c connection or 4VC4 connections or 12 VC3 connections or 252 VC12 connections.

one to four cards with 1 optical STM-16 access enabling one VC4-16c connection or4 VC4-4c connections or 16 VC4 connections or 48 VC3 connections or 1008 VC12connections

one to four GigaEthernet GIG-E cards enabling a Gigabit Ethernet over SDH transportservice on a VCG composed of n VC4 (n = 1 to 7)

one to N GigaEthernet xGE-DM (x=1 or 2 ports), exploitable in STM4 mode (N=10) orin STM16 mode(N=4) ; this card allows a Gigabit Ethernet over SDH transport serviceon one or two VCG (1 per port) composed of n VC4 (n = 1 to 4 in STM4 mode and n =1 to 7 in STM16 mode).

one to six GFP150 eXtra card with 8 10/100 Base TX Fast Ethernet ports, allowingup to 3 VC3 or 63 VC12 connections in 8 Virtually Concatenated Groups

• one extractable FAN-2G unit in bottom of the shelf.FAN-2G is a fan module in charge of pushing external ambiant temperature air into the shelffor power dissipation purposes.It is composed of three separately monitored and controlled FANs, all powered by the outputof the embedded 48V // 12V DC converter.Note that the 48V // 12 V DC converter can optionally be redunded for best possibleavailability.

The minimum configuration – in Terminal application - comprises a shelf equipped with one ortwo PSU cards (according to the type of inserted SWITCH HO/LO card), one CCU-2G card, oneCTRL-2G card, one SWITCH HO/LO card, one FAN-2G unit, one line card and one SDH orPDH tributary card (with corresponding LTU card if necessary) to which the necessarytransmission and redundancy cards are added.

For the connection of the different access points of cards, see § 1.3 – "Connection of Accesspoints"

1 - INSTALLATION


1.2 - INSTALLATION OF THE SHELF

The ADR2500 eXtra shelf, equipped with a back panel, can be installed in a 19" or ETSI rack.(see Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2).

The ADR2500 eXtra shelf is delivered with an adequate adaptation kit (in its own packing) :

• either a 19" kit constituted of 2 19" brackets (1 right + 1 left) + 12 screws M3x6 + 12 flatwashers M3,

• either an ETSI kit constituted of 2 ETSI brackets (1 right + 1 left) + 12 screws M3x6 + 12 flatwashers M3,

The mounting kit for installation of the shelf on the uprights of the 19" or ETSI rack, formed by 6cage nuts and 6 screws, is not supplied with the shelf

Installation in 19" rack

The ADR2500 eXtra has ventilation-type heat regulation system. When installing, provide for twoappropriate spaces : one below the shelf for the hold of air (minimum 75 mm), the other in top ofthe shelf for the evacuation of air and the passage of cables (minimum 75 mm).

Proceed as following :

• Insert the FAN-2G module in the shelf before integrating this one in the rack.

• provide a 14U position in the rack for each equipment, 2U space under the shelf and 2Uspace above the shelf, placing either a passive equipment (coiling assembly for example)either a deflector of air between 2 shelves.

• secure the mounting brackets for installation in a 19" rack to either side of the empty shelf,placing a washer behind the screw head.

• clip the 3 cage nuts M6 in their housings on the left upright of the rack (see distancebetween 2 cage nuts on figure),

• clip the 3 cage nuts M6 in their housings on the right upright of the rack (see distancebetween 2 cage nuts on figure),

• offer the rear of the shelf facing the rack,

• slide the shelf equipped with the FAN-2G module until the mounting brackets come intocontact with the uprights, in line with the 6 cage nuts, then secure using the 6 screwsM 6 x 12.

Installation in ETSI rack

The installation of the shelf in the ETSI rack is the same than the procedure used for the 19"rack.

In this case, use the set of mounting brackets specific to installation in ETSI rack

Provide a 25 SU position in the rack for each equipment, 3 SU space under the shelf and 4 SUspace above the shelf, placing either a passive equipment (coiling assembly for example) eithera deflector of air between 2 shelves.

1 - INSTALLATION


Figure 1-1 : Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in 19" rack

177,8 mm

177,8 mm

3 screwsM6x12

3 cagenuts M6

1 - INSTALLATION


Figure 1-2 : Installation of ADR2500 eXtra shelf in ETSI rack

3 screwsM6x12

3 cagenuts M6

175 mm

175 mm

1 - INSTALLATION


Figure 1-3 : ADR2500 eXtra equipped shelf

1 - INSTALLATION


LTU 5-1 LTU 5-2 LTU 5-3 LTU 6-1 LTU 6-2 LTU 6-3 LTU 7-1 LTU 7-2 LTU 7-3 LTU 8-1 LTU 8-2 LTU 8-32 Mbits34/45MbitsPDHPorts

2 MbitsPDHPorts

2 MbitsPDHPorts

2 Mbits34/45MbitsPDH Ports

2 MbitsPDHPorts

2 MbitsPDHPorts


2 MbitsPDHPorts

2 MbitsPDHPorts


2 MbitsPDHPorts

2 MbitsPDHPorts

PSU 1 PSU 2 PSU 3 TRIB 2 TRIB 4 TRIB 6 TRIB 8 LINE 2 SWITCH 1 SWITCH 2PSU-160PSU-2G

PSU-160PSU-2G

PSU-160PSU-2G

STM-1STM-4E1 Prot orworkingGFP150eXtra3E3DS3FA63E1FAxGE-DM

STM-1STM-4STM-16GIG-ExGE-DM

STM-1STM-463E163E1FA3E3DS33E3DS3FAGFP150eXtraxGE-DM


STM-16STM-4GIG-ExGE-DM

SWITCH HO/LOSW32HOLO


CCU EXT 1 EXT 2 CTRL TRIB 1 TRIB 3 TRIB 5 TRIB 7 LINE 1CCU-2G

AUX AUX CTRL-2G

STM-1STM-4E3 Prot orworkingGFP150eXtra3E3DS3FA63E1FAxGE-DM

STM-1STM-4STM16GIG-ExGE-DM




FAN (FAN-2G)

Table 1-1 : Designation of ADR2500 eXtra slots

The fully equipped ADR2500 eXtra contains (See Chapter 3 - Tables 3-1 to 3-4 : List ofADR2500 eXtra items) :

• one to twelve LTU interface cards :

one to twelve LTU21E120 or LTU21E75 cards (LTU 5-x to LTU 8-x) one to four LTU3E3DS3 cards (LTU 5-1, LTU 6-1, LTU 7-1, LTU 8-1)

If a LTU3E3DS3 card is inserted in LTU x-1 slot, the LTU x-2 and LTU x-3 cannot beused.

• one to three power supply unit cards PSU (PSU 1, PSU 2 and PSU 3 slots),

• one common connecting unit card CCU-2G (CCU slot)

• one control unit card CTRL-2G (CTRL slot),

• two auxiliary channels cards AUX (EXT 1 and EXT 2 slots),

• one to ten interface cards as required :

one to five PDH 63E1 cards (TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 and TRIB 2 slots)In TRIB 5 to TRIB 8, this card is mandatory associated to a corresponding LTU21E1group from 1 to 3.In TRIB 2, this card is used either in protection mode or in working mode ; in this lastcase, it will be associated to a LTU21E1 group from 1 to 3

1 - INSTALLATION


one to six PDH 63E1FA cards (TRIB 1, TRIB 2, TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots) one to five PDH 3E3DS3 cards (TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 and TRIB 1 slots)

In TRIB 5 to TRIB 8, this card is mandatory associated to the correspondingLTU3E3DS3.In TRIB 1, this card is used either in protection mode or in working mode ; in this lastcase, it will be associated to one LTU3E3DS3.

one to six PDH 3E3DS3FA cards (TRIB 1, TRIB 2, TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots) one to eight STM-1 cards (TRIB 1 to TRIB 8 slots) one to ten STM-4 cards (TRIB 1 to TRIB 8, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots) one to four STM-16 cards (TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots),

The STM-16 cards which take place in TRIB 3 or TRIB 4 are exploited without MS-SPRing Protection ; in these configurations, the TRIB 1, TRIB 5 and TRIB 7 or TRIB2, TRIB 4 and TRIB 6 slots cannot be used, because the STM-16 card uses all itsbandwidth.

one to four GIG-E cards (TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)If the GIG-E cards take place in TRIB 3 or TRIB 4, the TRIB 1, TRIB 5 and TRIB 7 orTRIB 2, TRIB 4 and TRIB 6 slots cannot be exploited, because the GIG-E card usesan internal bandwidth equivalent to a STM-16.

One to N xGE-DM cards according to the chosen configuration :- in STM4 mode, N=10 (TRIB 1 to TRIB 8, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)- en STM16 mode, N=4 (TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 or LINE 2 slots)The xGE-DM cards, configured in STM16 mode, which take place in TRIB 3 or TRIB 4slots make not exploitable the TRIB 1, TRIB 5 and TRIB 7 or TRIB 2, TRIB 6 andTRIB 8 slots, because the xGE-DM card uses an internal bandwidth equivalent to aSTM-16

one to six GFP150 eXtra cards (TRIB 1, TRIB 2 or TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots)

• one or two SWITCH HO/LO cards (SWITCH 1 and SWITCH 2 slots),If the equipement receives a SW32 HO/LO card, the "LINE 1" and "LINE 2" slots cannot beused.

• one FAN-2G unit located at the bottom of the shelf (FAN slot).

No adjustment or configuration is required on the equipment to be installed. All parameter valuesare defined during the commissioning procedure and using the on-board operating software.

The "TRIB" and "LINE" slots have a double width in order to be able to receive 63E1, 63E1FA,3E3DS3, 3E3DS3FA, SFP release STM-n, GIG-E and xGE-DM cards.

The STM-n cards will be positioned in the right part of the slot, the left part receiving anappropriated cover.

The GFP150 eXtra cards will take place in the left part of the slot, with cover in the right part.

Covers are also provided for the other empty slots

All connections are performed on the front panel of the cards.

Layout of cards

REMINDER : Before all intervention on the cards, be sure to put on an antistatic bracelet.

Refer to Table 1-1 : Designation of ADR2500 eXtra slots

1 - INSTALLATION


TRIB and LINE slots are unmarked slots with the following constraints :

- the STM-16 and GIG-E cards take only place in the TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1 and LINE 2slots.

- the xGE-DM cards can be configured in STM16 mode only in the TRIB 3, TRIB 4, LINE 1and LINE 2 slots

- the LINE 1 and LINE 2 slots can only receive STM-4, STM-16, GIG-E or xGE-DM cards.

To make wiring more easy and fulfil the same configuration in all the sites, it is recommended toproceed as following :

• place the LTU cards from left to right by using of preference LTU 6-x and LTU 8-x blocks forthe 2 Mbit/s connectings (E1) and the LTU 5-x and LTU 7-x blocks for the 34/45 Mbit/sconnectings (E3/DS3).

• place the first PSU card in the PSU 1 slot,

• place the first AUX card in the EXT 1 slot,

• place the first SWITCH HO/LO card in the SWITCH 1 slot,

• In the absence of 2 Mbit/s connectings (E1), in order to allow STM-16 tributaries and aprotection of 34/45 Mbit/s accesses : place the tributary PDH, STM-1, STM-4, GFP150 eXtra card(s) by starting with TRIB

1, TRIB 3, TRIB 5 and TRIB 7 slots and by continuing with TRIB 2, TRIB 4, TRIB 6and TRIB 8 slots

place the first tributary STM-16 card in the TRIB 4 slot, place the first line STM-16 card in the LINE 2 slot, place the first GIG-E or xGE-DM card in the TRIB 4 slot,

• In the absence of 34/45 Mbit/s connectings (E3/DS3), in order to allow STM-16 tributariesand a protection of 2 Mbit/s accesses : place the tributary PDH, STM-1, STM-4, GFP150 eXtra card(s) by starting with TRIB

2, TRIB 4, TRIB 6 and TRIB 8 slots and by continuing with TRIB 1, TRIB 3, TRIB 5and TRIB 7 slots

place the first tributary STM-16 card in the TRIB 3 slot, place the first line STM-16 card in the LINE 2 slot, place the first GIG-E or xGE-DM card in the TRIB 3 slot,

• secure the cards, the covers and the ventilation unit by screwing.

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3 - CONNECTION OF ACCESS POINTS

All the connections are performed on the front panel of the cards. The PSU, 63E1, 3E3DS3 andSWITCH HO/LO cards do not have connectors ; the power supply cord is connected to theCCU-2G card.

The cards can be removed without intervening on the other cards or on their connections.

On the LTU21E120 and LTU21E75 cards :

• 21x2Mbit/s traffic ports "E1 OUTPUT" and "E1 INPUT"

On the LTU3EDS3 card :

• 3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports "TR" and "REC"

On the CCU-2G card :

• station power supply and alarms access "POWER/ALM 48V 13A maxi"

• remote signaling and remote control access "LOOPS"

• 2MHz synchronization access " SYNC"

On the CTRL-2G card :

• Ethernet management access "ETH"

• IP address configuration access "COMM" : allows the connection to a VT 100 terminal oremulation

On the AUX card :

• 3 Engineering Order Wire access points

On the 63E1FA card :

• 3x 21x2Mbit/s traffic ports "E1 OUTPUT" and "E1 INPUT"

On the 3EDS3FA card :

• 3x 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports "TR" and "REC"

On the STM-n cards, according to the kind of card :

• 1 to 4 optical STM-1 access points "TR" and "REC"

• 4 electrical STM-1 access points "TR" and "REC"

• 1 optical STM-4 access "TR" and "REC"

• 1 optical STM-16 access "TR" and "REC"

On the GIG-E card :

• optical Gigabit Ethernet access "TR" and "REC"

• maintenance access "RS232" : allows the connection to a VT 100 terminal or emulation

1 - INSTALLATION


On the xGE-DM card :

• 1 or 2 optical Gigabit Ethernet access "TR" and "REC"

On the GFP150 eXtra card :

• 8 10/100 Base TX Fast Ethernet access points "ETH"

Refer to the list of available cables in Chapter 3 - Spare parts and Cables.

Connection rules

⇒ All the access points are provided directly on the front panel of the cards.

⇒ All the cables are directed upwards through the intermediary of fibers-guide, except thecable of power supply that is oriented downwards.

⇒ The cable paths should not interfere with extraction of a module; therefore, the connecting ofthe shelf should have sufficient slack.

1.3.1 - Connection to LTU21E1 or LTU21E75 cards

Figure 1-4 – Front panel of LTU21E120 card

"E1 INPUT" and "E1 OUTPUT" G.703 21x2 Mbit/s traffic ports :

ports 21 x 2 Mbit/s traffic ports compliant with the ITU-T G.703Recommendation (§ 9.3 for input port, § tab.7 for output port) andETS 300 166

Bit rate 2,048 Mbit/s ± 50 ppm,

Code HDB3,

Impedance 75 Ω or 120 Ω balanced,

Connector SUB D HD female 44 pins supporting L907 cable (21 ports).

15 13044 31

16

1 - INSTALLATION


This interface uses two connectors : E1 INPUT connector for inputs (named RX) andE1 OUTPUT connector for outputs (named TX).

Pin N° Ports Signal name Comments

16 GND ground 31 1 TX(RX) 1B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 1 TX(RX) 1A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 17 2 TX(RX) 2B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 32 TX(RX) 2A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 2 3 TX(RX) 3B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 18 TX(RX) 3A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 33 4 TX(RX) 4B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 3 TX(RX) 4A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 19 5 TX(RX) 5B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 34 TX(RX) 5A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 4 6 TX(RX) 6B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 20 TX(RX) 6A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 35 7 TX(RX) 7B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 5 TX(RX) 7A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 21 8 TX(RX) 8B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 36 TX(RX) 8A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 6 9 TX(RX) 9B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 22 TX(RX) 9A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 37 10 TX(RX) 10B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 7 TX(RX) 10A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 23 11 TX(RX) 11B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 38 TX(RX) 11A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 8 12 TX(RX) 12B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 24 TX(RX) 12A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 39 13 TX(RX) 13B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 9 TX(RX) 13A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 25 14 TX(RX) 14B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 40 TX(RX) 14A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 10 15 TX(RX) 15B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 26 TX(RX) 15A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 41 16 TX(RX) 16B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 11 TX(RX) 16A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point) 27 TX(RX) 17B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 42

17 TX(RX) 17A Output (input) 2 Mbit/s (cold point)

12 TX(RX) 18B Output (Input) 2 Mbit/s (hot point) 28








15 GND Ground

NOTE : The shielding of the connector case is connected to the subrack front panel ground

Note : on each LTU, the Retiming function is supported by the #1 and #2 ports

1 - INSTALLATION

Installation and User Guide -Page A1-14 Sagem Co

1.3.2 - Connection to LTU3E3DS3 card

Figure 1-5 – Front panel of LTU3E3DS3 card

"TR" and "REC" G.703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports :

Ports 75 ohms 34/45 Mbit/s Interface compliant to ITU-T G.703(§ 11) Recommendation and ETS 300 166 allowing 34 Mbit/s or45Mbit/s plesiochronous stream exclusive connection

Connector 1.0/2.3 75 Ω

1.3.3 - Connection to CCU-2G card

The ADR2500 eXtraIt operates with onreplacing a faulty PSThe ADR2500 eXtracard.

Remote signaling,Remote control access

2MHz G.703Synchronization access

Power supply andstation alarm access

288 113 969-01mmunication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

Figure 1-6 : Front panel of CCU-2G card

has three PSU cards.e or two PSU cards if a backup power supply card is not present or when

U card. can be supplied by a PAPA : power supply input is located on the CCU-2G

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3.3.1 - "POWER/ALM" connector

« male » connector HE5 - 25 pins

Pin N° Signal name

1 -48V214 -48V2

2 -48V215 -48V2 (not used)

3 -48V116 -48V1

4 -48V117 -48V1 (not used)

5 Audible minor alarm18 0BS

6 0BS (not used)19 Visual minor alarm

7 Audible major alarm20 -48VS

8 -48VS (not used)21 Visual major alarm

9 OB122 OB2

10 OB123 OB2

11 Shelf ground24 Shelf ground

12 Shelf ground25 Shelf ground

13 Shelf ground

NOTE : The connector shielding is connected to the equipment ground.

: OB is the logical "OR" of signals OB1 and OB2 of the power supply access.

Power supply interface :

Input voltage : One or two - 48 V power supply sources, SELV type (Safety ExtraLow Voltage)

Operating voltage range : - 36 V to - 60 V

Maximum voltage range : - 36 V to - 72 V

Power : 260 W max. (see Chapter 4).

The audible and visual minor alarm outputs are interconnected justlike the audible and visual major alarm outputs.

1 - INSTALLATION


PAPA connection cable (see diagram below) :

« PAPA » equipment side

« male » connector HE5 25 pins

ADR2500 eXtra side

« Power/ALM 48V 13A max. »

"Female" connector HE5 25 pins

Figure 1-7 : «POWER/ALM » power supply cable

Warning : As the shelf power supply connector is located on the CCU card, it is mandatory todisconnect the powering cable from the POWER/ALM connector before CCU card extraction, toprevent any risk of contact with hazardous voltages while manipulating the card.

1.3.3.2 - Remote signaling, remote control and station alarms access: ”LOOPS"

Access 4 remote signaling inputs (Local user inputs) for floating contacts,biased to - 48 VS internally, active in the closed state, with galvanicinsulation (loop current between 1 and 10 mA),

2 dry loop outputs (common, break and make) (Local user outputs)used as station alarm or remote control (maximum current = 100mA on resistive load).

(Schematic diagram of a dry loop)

« female » connector 9158 1

HE5 - 15 pins

M C B

1 - INSTALLATION


Pin N° Quad Pair Color Signal name In/Out Remarks

1 2 1 J ALA2R St9 1 2 B ALA2C St

2 1 2 Vi ALA2T St

Outgoing dry loop No. 2

10 2 1 G ALA1R St3 1 1 Bc ALA1C St

11 1 1 G ALA1T St

Outgoing dry loop No. 1

4 GND Signal Ground12 4 1 V TELE4B (OBs) St Remote signaling loop No. 4

5 4 1 G TELE4A Et13 3 2 R TELE3B (OBs) St Remote signaling loop No. 3

6 3 2 Vi TELE3A Et14 3 1 N TELE2B (OBs) St Remote signaling loop No. 2

7 3 1 G TELE2A Et15 2 2 M TELE1B (OBs) St Remote signaling loop No. 1

8 2 2 Vi TELE1A Et

NOTE : The Quad, Pair and Color indications concern the 4-Quad cable L907 of the SAGEMcable.

1.3.3.3 - 2 MHz G.703 sync access : "SYNC"

Access 2 external sync input interfaces operating at 2 MHz G.703 (T3) and2 identical sync output interfaces operating at 2 MHz G.703 (T4),comply with recommendation G.703 of ITU-T (§ 13.3 and § 13.4 forinput interface, § tab.10 § 13.2 tab.11 and § 13.4 for output table)

Impedance 120 Ω balanced,

« female » connector 6

5

9

1HE5 9 pins (120 Ω).

Pin N° Quad Pair Color Signal name Remarks

1 GND Signal Ground6 1 1 G TX1 RING (T4-) Output T4-1 (LO)

2 1 1 Bc TX1 TIP (T4+) Output T4-1 (HI)7 1 2 Vi RX2 TIP (T3+) Input T3-2 (HI)

3 2 1 J RX1 TIP (T3+) Input T3-1 (HI)8 2 1 G RX1 RING (T3-) Input T3-1 (LO)

4 1 2 B RX2 RING (T3-) Input T3-2 (LO)9 2 2 Vi TX2 RING (T4-) Output T4-2(LO)

5 2 2 M TX2 IP (T4+) Output T4-2(HI)

NOTE : The connector shielding is connected to the electrical ground on the front panel.

The Quad, Pair and Color indications concern the two-Quad cable L907 of the cable supplied bySAGEM.The 75 Ω ohm unbalanced interfaces are obtained by adding a cable which also provides BNCconnectors.

1 - INSTALLATION

Installation and Page A1-18

1.3.4 - Connection to CTRL-2G card

1.3.4.1 - Ma

Access

Rate

« female

P

1

2

3

4

5

* The AD

Card alaLEDs (sta

Alarm acknowledge button
Major/critical and minoralarm indicator LEDs for
the whole equipment

User Guide - 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

Figure 1-8 : Front panel of CTRL-2G card

nagement access : "COMM" connector

RS232, interconnection of a console or VT100 emulation

19200 bauds (8 data bits, no parity bit and 1 stop bit),

» connector HE5 – 9 pins

in N° Signal name Remarks

DCD Data Carrier Detect (Connected to DSR)6 DSR Data Set Ready (to DCE)*

RX Data reception (to DCE)*7 RTS Request To Send (from DCE)*

TX Data send (from DCE)*8 CTS Clear To Send (to DCE)*

DTR Data Terminal Ready (from DCE)*9 RI Ring Indicator (not connected)

GND Signal Ground

R2500 eXtra is seen as a DCE.

6

5

9

1

rm indicatortus, in service)

SmartCard access ManagementEthernet access

COMM access

1 - INSTALLATION


« COMM » equipment side

« male » connector HE5 9 pins

VT100 or PC side

« Female » connector HE5 9 pins

Figure 1-9 : « Comm » connection cable

WARNING : Only use a straight cord, such as the one provided by SAGEM.

1.3.4.2 - Management access : "ETH" connector

Access Ethernet management interface operating at 10 Mbit/s in half-duplex or full-duplex mode in accordance with mode used by party(Ethernet port is dynamically adapted to each new connection ofthe party),If the Ethernet interface doesn't work, force the configurationof the network card of the PC in duplex half mode.

Connector

Contact 8Contact 1

RJ45 (10 base T) : front view

Pin N°. Signal name Remarks

1 TX_ETH_TIP Ethernet output (HI)2 TX_ETH_RING Ethernet output (LO)3 RX_ETH_TIP Ethernet input (HI)

4 and 5 NC BSTERM16 RX_ETH_RING Ethernet input (LO)

7 and 8 NC BSTERM1

NOTE : Two indicator LEDs are associated to the "ETH" connector :• green indicator LED : traffic status indicator,• yellow indicator LED : link status indicator.

1 - INSTALLATION


Cable for connection to an HUB (see diagram below).

ADR2500 eXtra « Eth » side« male » shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

HUB side « male » shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

Figure 1-10 : « Straight-through Ethernet » cable

Cable for direct connection to a PC (see diagram below).

ADR2500 eXtra « Eth » side« male » shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

PC side « male » shielded RJ45 connector with 8 pins

Figure 1-11 : « Cross-over Ethernet » cable

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3.5 - Connection to AUX cards

Figure 1-12 : Front panel of AUX card

Each AUX card has three ports (6 ports in total with identical pin assignments)E1 or F1 overhead bytes of STM-n tributaries or aggregates can be rerouted to these ports, fororder wire purposes for instance.In addition, four internal connections can be created between E1 or between F1 bytes.

Connection of service channels :

Access V.11 synchronous (differential)

Rate 64 kbit/s

« female » connector

915 8 1

HE5 - 15 pins

Pin N° Signal name Polarity Remarks

1 - Not connected9 TB (+)

2 TA (-)Input, data to send on STM-n frame and sampled on rising edgeof clockT64 (B-A)

10 TOFPB (+)3 TOFPA (-)

Output, transmit Octet Frame Pulse indicating position of bit 1and transmitted on rising edge of clock T64 (B-A)

11 RB (+)4 RA (-)

Output, data extracted from STM-n frame and transmitted onfalling edge of clock R64 (B-A)

12 ROFPB (+)5 ROFPA (-)

Output, Receive Octet Frame Pulse indicating position of bit 1and transmitted on falling edge of clock R64 (B-A)

13 R64B (+)6 R64A (-)

Output, 64 kHz reception clock

14 T64B (+)7 T64A (-)

Output, 64 kHz transmit clock

15 - Not connected8 Signal Ground

Cable for connection of V11 access to an ARDAX equipment or a VDS EOW300 equipment(see diagram below).

Figure 1-13 : « AUX/EOW » connection cable

1 - INSTALLATION


Timing diagram of "EOW/AUX" interface in counter-directional mode (64 kbit/ssynchronous operation) :

B8 B1 B2

B8 B1 B2

R64 (B-A)

R (B-A)

ROFP (B-A)

T64 (B-A)

T (B-A)

TOFP (B-A)

(Output, reception clock)

(Output, received data)

(Output, reception frame pulse)

(Output, transmit clock)

(Input, data to send)

(Output, transmit byte sync)

1.3.6 - Connection to 3E3DS3FA card

Figure 1-14 – Front panel of 3E3DS3FA card

"TR" and "REC" G.703 34 or 45 Mbit/s traffic ports :

Ports 75 ohms 34/45 Mbit/s Interface compliant to ITU-T G.703(§ 11) Recommendation and ETS 300 166 allowing 34 Mbit/s or45Mbit/s plesiochronous stream exclusive connection

Connector 1.0/2.3 75 Ω

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3.7 - Connection to 63E1FA card

Figure 1-15 – Front panel of 63E1FA card

"E1 INPUT" and "E1 OUTPUT" G.703 21x2 Mbit/s traffic ports :

ports 21 x 2 Mbit/s traffic ports compliant with the ITU-T G.703Recommendation (§ 9.3 for input port, § tab.7 for output port) andETS 300 166

Bit rate 2,048 Mbit/s ± 50 ppm,

Code HDB3,

Impedance 120 Ω balanced,

Connector SUB D HD female 44 pins supporting L907 cable (21 ports).

15 13044 31

16

The E1 INPUT and E1 OUTPUT connectors and their connections are are identical to those ofthe LTU21E1 card. (1.3.1)

Note : on the 63E1FA card the retiming function is supported by the ports #1 to #6

1.3.8 - Connection of optical STM-n access points

Figure 1-16 : Front panel of STM-1 interface card

1 - INSTALLATION




All the access points are located on the front panel of the cards :

• the STM-1 cards have 1 to 4 optical STM-1 interfaces

• the STM-4 cards have 1 optical STM-4 interface

• the STM-16 cards have 1 optical STM-16 interface

Each interface has a transmission access "TR" (Equipment output) and a reception access"REC"( Input).

Remove the contact protection connector.

Connect the STM access points to the connectors on the front panel :

⇒ Transmission TR connector

⇒ Reception REC connector

1 - INSTALLATION


"TR" and "REC" access points:

« Single mode » interfaces

Common characteristics

Standards ITU-T G.957 and SFF-8472-Rev 9.5

Code Uncoded (NRZ)

Optical fiber single mode (1310 nm or 1550 nm, ITU-T G.652)

Connector SC / PC (STM-n cards) or LC / PC (STM-n SFP cards)

SFP optical modules : Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver MultiSource Agreement 14 Sept 2000

Interfaces S1.1 L1.1 L1.2 S4.1 L4.1

Wave length 1310 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1310 nm 1310 nm

Rate155,52 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

155,52 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

155,52 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

622,08 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

622,08 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

Guaranteedattenuation 0-12 dB 10-28 dB 10-28 dB 0-12 dB 10-24 dB

Transmit power -15 to - 8 dBm -5 to 0 dBm -5 to 0 dBm -15 to -8 dBm -3 to + 2dBm

Sensitivity at 10-10 -28 dBm -34 dBm -34 dBm -28 dBm -28 dBm

Max. acceptablepower -8 dBm -10 dBm -10 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm

Typical range (*) 0 - 28 km 22 - 68 km 40 - 100 km 0 - 28 km 22 - 58 km

Optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB 1 dB

Interfaces L4.2 L16.1 L16.2 L16.2+ (1) (2) U16.2 (3)

Wave length 1550 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm 1550 nm 1550,92 nm

Rate622,08 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

2488,32 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

2488,32 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

2488,32 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

2488,32 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

Guaranteedattenuation 10-24 dB 10-24 dB 10-24 dB 13-27 dB 25-39 dB

Transmit power -3 to + 2dBm -2 to +2 dBm -2 to 2 dBm +1 to +5 dBm +14 to +17 dBm

Sensitivity at 10-10 -28 dBm -27 dBm -28 dBm -28 dBm -28 dBm

Max. acceptablepower -8 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm -8 dBm

Typical range (*) 35 - 92 km 0** - 58 km 0** - 85 km 50 - 100 km 80 - 150 km

Optical path penalty 1 dB 1 dB 2 dB 2 dB 3 dB

Table 1-2 : Characteristics of single mode interfaces

For the STM-16 cards, the optical fibers attached to the transmission laser and to the receptionphotodiode are single mode devices with 10 micron core.

1 - INSTALLATION


(*) The typical ranges suppose the use of normalized fibers adapted to the emission wavelengthand for the mentioned optic penalty. A previous measure of the optic balance is recommended

(**) 0 Km with optical attenuators if necessary

Note (1) : No wavelength multiplexing : use lasers with wavelength of 1550,92 nm ± 0,1 nmWith wavelength multiplexing : use lasers with following wavelengths : 1550,92 nm ± 0,1 nm,1547,72 nm ± 0,1 nm, 1549,32 nm ± 0,1 nm, 1552,52 nm ± 0,1.nmThese interfaces must be used with MUX 10000 Unit (see Annex C).

Note (2) : If wavelength multiplexing is implemented, a 6dB attenuation for the opticalmultiplexer/demultiplexer pair inserted on the line should be taken into account.

Note (3) : The U16.2 characteristics are given for a U16.2 card associated to the « OPTICAL BOOSTER + 14 DBM » unit (see Annex B).

WARNING (1) : In case of higher ambient temperature, the radiator equipping the L16.2+ andU16.2 interface cards can reach a temperature superior to 50°C. This heat risk at the extraction ofthe card is indicated by a sticker in front panel.

(2) : Input optical power > -8dBm may cause irreversible damageFor 0 km, use an appropriate attenuation patch cord or add-on attenuatorWarranty void if not properly used

« Multimode » interface

Interfaces MM1

Standard ANSI T1.646

Wavelength 1310 nm

Rate155,52 Mbit/s

±20 ppm

Code Uncoded (NRZ),

Guaranteed attenuation 0 to 4 dB

Transmit power -20 to -14dBm

Sensitivity at 10-10 - 31 dBm

Max. acceptable power -14 dBm

Typical range 0 – 2 km

Passband ≥ 500 MHz per km

Connector SC/PC

Table 1-3 : Characteristics of multimode interface

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3.9 - Connection of electrical STM-1 access points

Figure 1-19 : Front panel of 4ERE interface card

The 4ERE card has 4 electrical STM-1 interfaces : each interface has a transmission access"TR" (equipment output) and a reception access "REC" (input).

"TR" and "REC" access points :

Rate 155,520 Mbit/s ± 20 ppm,

Standard ITU-T G.703 §15,

Code CMI,

Electrical level 1V ± 0.1V peak-to-peak

Input attenuation 12.7 dB in √f at 78MHz

Adaptation ≥15 dB between 8MHz and 240MHz

attenuation at input

Connector 1.0/2.3 75 ohms

WARNING : Prior to any connection on the ERE card, be sure that the "male"contact of the jumper is properly centered.

1.3.10 - Connection to GIG-E cards

Figure 1-20 : Front panel of GIG-E interface card

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3.10.1 - Gigabit Ethernet access points

The GIG-E cards offer one or two optical Gigabit Ethernet interface on their front panel : eachinterface has a transmission access "TR" (Equipment output) and a reception access "REC"(Input).


Connect the Ethernet access points to the SC connectors on the front panel :



"TR" and "REC" access points:

Interfaces SX LX ZX

Interface Multimode Single mode Single mode

Standard IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z No standard

Wavelength 770 - 860 nm 1270 – 1355 nm 1500 – 1580 nm

Rate1250 Mbit/s±100 ppm

1250 Mbit/s±100 ppm


Transmit power– Fiber 10 µm– Fiber 50 µm– Fiber 62,5 µm

- -9,5 dBm min-9,5 dBm min

-11 dBm min-11,5 dBm min-11,5 dBm min

0 to 5 dBm--

Sensitivity at 10-10 -17 dBm -19 dBm -21 dBm

Max. acceptablepower 0 dBm -3 dBm -3 dBm

Typical range– Fiber 10 µm– Fiber 50 µm– Fiber 62,5 µm

-500 m min220 m min

5000 m min550 m min550 m min

40 km min--

Connector SC/PC SC/PC SC/PC

Table 1-4 : Characteristics of GigaEthernet interface

1.3.10.2 - Maintenance access : "RS232" connector

This is a private access for Sagem staff ; it is not usefull to users.

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3.11 - Connection to xGE-DM cards

Figure 1-21 : Front panel of 2GE-DM interface card

Gigabit Ethernet access points

The xGE-DM cards offer one or two optical Gigabit Ethernet interface on their front panel : eachinterface has a transmission access "TR" (Equipment output) and a reception access "REC"(Input).


Connect the Ethernet access points to the SC connectors on the front panel :



Interfaces SX LX ZX

Interface Multimode Single mode Single mode

Standard IEEE 802.3z IEEE 802.3z No standard

Wavelength 770 - 860 nm 1270 – 1355 nm 1500 – 1580 nm

Rate1250 Mbit/s±100 ppm



Transmit power– Fiber 10 µm– Fiber 50 µm– Fiber 62,5 µm

- -9,5 dBm min-9,5 dBm min

-11 dBm min-11,5 dBm min-11,5 dBm min

-5 to 0 dBm--

Sensitivity at 10-10 -17 dBm -19 dBm -21 dBm

Max. acceptablepower 0 dBm -3 dBm -3 dBm

Typical range– Fiber 10 µm– Fiber 50 µm– Fiber 62,5 µm

-500 m min220 m min

5000 m min550 m min550 m min

40 km min--

Connector LC/PC LC/PC LC/PC (2GE-DM-SFP)SC/PC (xGE-DM-ZX)

Table 1-5 : Characteristics of GigaEthernet interface

1 - INSTALLATION


1.3.12 - Connection to GFP150 eXtra card

Figure 1-22 : Front panel of GFP150 eXtra card

"ETH" Interface :

Port Traffic Ethernet interface operating at 10 or 100 Mbit/s in half-duplex or full- duplex mode according to the mode used by theinterlocutor (validated or not autonegotiation),

The ADRGFP150 have a direct or a cross Ethernet interface depending on the configuration.

Every access supports the automatic inversion of pairs (MDIX auto) in order to avoid therecourse to cross-over cables. However it is possible to force the type of cable by configuration.

Connector Ethernet 10 or 100 BaseT – Shielded RJ45 type.

Contact 8Contact 1

Front view

Pin N° Signal name Function(direct interface)

Function(cross interface)

1 TX_ETH_TIP Ethernet output (hot point) Ethernet input (hot point)2 TX_ETH_RING Ethernet output (cold point) Ethernet input (cold point)3 RX_ETH_TIP Ethernet input (hot point) Ethernet output (hot point)4 NC Reserved Reserved5 NC Reserved Reserved6 RX_ETH_RING Ethernet input (cold point) Ethernet output (cold point)

7 and 8 NC Reserved Reserved

NOTE: Two LEDs are linked to the "ETH" interface:• Green LED : Link status indicator,• Yellow LED : Traffic status indicator.

The connection cables are identical those of the "ETH" management access of the CTRL-2G card(see § 1.3.4.2 Figure 1-10 and Figure 1-11)

The using and the working of the GFP150 extra card are described in the chapter 7.

1 - INSTALLATION


1.4 - SHELF WITHOUT PDH PROTECTION

A new type of shelf, without PDH protection, is available from P2.4 release.

The difference with the other shelf is this one does not offer LTU connectors.

This shelf extends connectivity in a number of PDH access points with the 63E1FA and3E3DS3FA cards and does not manage the 63E1, 3E3DS3, LTU21E120, LTU21E75 andLTU3E3DS3 cards.

PSU-160PSU-2G

PSU-160PSU-2G

PSU-160PSU-2G

STM-1STM-4GFP150eXtra3E3DS3FA63E1FAxGE-DM

STM-1STM-4STM-16GIG-ExGE-DM

STM-1STM-463E1FA3E3DS3FAGFP150eXtraxGE-DM





CCU EXT 1 EXT 2 CTRL TRIB 1 TRIB 3 TRIB 5 TRIB 7 LINE 1CCU-2G

AUX AUX CTRL-2G

STM-1STM-4GFP150eXtra3E3DS3FA63E1FAxGE-DM

STM-1STM-4STM16GIG-ExGE-DM




FAN (FAN-2G)

1 - INSTALLATION


2 - COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION


2 COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

2.1 - COMMISSIONING

The equipment can be commissioned and operated from a PC equipped with a VT100emulation system and a Web Browser : the minimum configuration is defined in section 2.1.1

To access the equipment via the management function, a local terminal with VT100 emulation isnecessary the first time the equipment is commissioned : however, this will only enable theparameter configurations required for the communication function (definition of equipment IPaddress).

2.1.1 - Required configuration

The minimum configuration proposed for the operation PC is given below :

Description Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Observations

Processor 450 MHz Pentium III

Memory 64 MB 128 MB

Display 1024x768

RS232 serial interfaceSUB-D straight cable

9pts Male / FemaleInterfaces

Ethernet 10 Base T network card RJ45 crossed Ethernetcable

Operating system Windows NT4 / 2000 Windows XP

HyperTerminal for Windows

SoftwaresWeb Browser : Internet Explorer1 5.5 (*)

Table 2-1 : Minimum configuration for operation PC

(*) The operating PC can be equipped with Internet Explorer 6.0 (delivered release with Windows XP).

1 Trademark of Microsoft Corporation



Equipment inventory

Check of - 48 V power supplies

Aggregate optical loopback

Continuity check of tributary accesses

Redundancy check of - 48 V

Check of alarms and A / B loops

Local transmission test (30 min.) *

Optical connection

Connection of external synchronization input ofa "master" equipment (optional)

Preparation of configuration

Local test of lastequipment on network ?

no

LOCAL TEST

Insertion of communication parameters (VT100)

Time set and insertion of tributary accesses test configuration(web browser)

Link connection

Optical measurements

24 H performance test on link

Reset of performance counters

Operational equipment(preparation of installation data package)

yes

an under-equippedUnit equipment

Backup of configuration

* case of

Figure 2-1 : Commissioning process for an ADR2500 eXtra network



2.1.2 - Procedure

On initial start-up, the equipment analyzes its constitution and takes this as the expectedconfiguration, under controlled service. It is therefore recommend to insert all the interfacecards before switching on the equipment in order to accelerate the commissioning procedure.

NOTES :

- The initial commissioning procedure is normally carried out in factory.

- If the four LEDs of the CTRL-2G card permanently flash, this means the card is passedin degraded mode To go out of this degraded mode, see the chapter 6 "DEGRADEDMODE"

Start up the power supply connected to the equipment.

The equipment runs its selftests :

• when the selftests are successful, the green indicator LED "STATUS" of the CTRL-2Gcard lights permanent

• if not successful, a flashing code defines the faulty selftest (contact the Hotline)

Configure the IP address for the equipment using the VT100 (see § 2.1.5)

Using the web browser (see § 2.1.6) :

• Up to date the time and date of the equipment (Equipment > Date and time menu) if thisone is not managed by a NMS network manager. In presence of a NMS manager, theupdating is automatic

• Configure the remote management ports using the web browser

Connect the PDH 2, 34, 45 Mbit/s, STM-1, STM-4, STM-16, Ethernet, GigaEthernet, FastEthernet and SYNC access points required in accordance with the equipment composition

Connect the necessary AUX access points

Download a predefined configuration or generate the required configuration using the webbrowser :

• Create the connections on the PDH , STM-n and GFP150 eXtra cards

• Create the connections between the two GigaEthernet cards of the network. Select thenumber of used VC4 on each card, then apply the configuration

• Setup the required protection features (MSP, MS-SPRing, SNC, Cards protections, etc.)

• Select the synchronization source and modify its parameters if necessary

• Create the overhead byte traffic connections

• If necessary, modify the monitoring parameters and the alarms configuration

The default configuration for the various parameters is given in § 2.2.3

Perform the STM-16 link tests observing the described process in procedure Figure 2-1 :Commissioning process for an ADR2500 eXtra network

2 - COMMISSIONING AND O

Installation and User Guide- 288 11Page A2-4 Sagem C

The equipment is now ope

The operation alarms may

Check the access points points and correct any pro

Back up the configuration

NOTE : Once the comaccess points (PDH, STor removing cards whic§ 2.4.3.

2.1.3 - Description of co

With maximal configurationimplementing 34 PPP interfa

Figure 2-2 : Co

3PPP

App

R

HTTP

PER

3 969-ommun

ration

indica

connecblems

.

missioM-1, S

h are p

mm

(if aces.

mmun

lication

/ SNMP

ATION

01ication document. Reproduction and disclo

al.

te an incorrect access points conn

tion and the alarms corresponding you may have detected.

ning procedure has been perforTM-4, STM-16, GigaEthernet or Fowered up is possible (with restric

unication function

ll tributaries are STM-1), the

ication function on an ADR2500

Manage

Operati

1ETH

ection.

to the connected access

med, connecting additionalast Ethernet) and insertingtion for the PSU card : see

routing function enables

ment access

on protocols

s
4 R Routing function
sure prohibited

eXtra


Installation and UserSagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

Figure 2-3 : Example of communication on an ADR2500 eXtra, ADR 2500equipment network

To correctly operate, the application needs a unique address in the nrules are reviewed in Annex A and apply to the numbered interfaces).

The Ethernet port also needs an explicit address if operating. On the otcarried by the DCCs of the SDH links or by the management VC12, explicit address, thus facilitating implementation of these and limiting addresses.« Unnumbered » type is thus selected in the screen : « IP PaConfiguration ».

There are however certain cases in which explicit addressing of the PPP

• if the SDH link used is connected to an ADR 155c for releases P

• if two equipment are connected by more than one PPP link.

• In these conditions, for proper operation, OSPF routing daemon shinterfaces, not RIP.

NOTE : The utilization of a management port of P type (P1 or P2) requresources VC12 at the level of the switching matrix, but one alone VC12

ADR2500 eXtra

R

R

R

RR

H

H

H/ S

H

P

P

P

P

P

E

E

E

Tapa

IONOS NMS

D1 – D3D4-D6on STM16 West

DDo

D1 – D3on STM16 East

ManagementVC12 P1/P2

E

D1 - D3 on STM1

H

ManagementVC12 P1/P2

Oequ

ADR155c

ADR2500 eXtra

ADR2500 eXtra

D1 – D3on STM16 West

Do

D1 – D3

E

on STM16 West

TTP / SNMP

TTP / SNMP

TTPNMP

TTP / SNMP
TTP / SNMP
PP

PP

PP

PP

PP

Guide-

c, ADR

etwork

her hando not the nu

ramete

ports i

1 or P2

ould be

ires the on the

TH

TH

TH

TH

ADR 2500c
TH
he operating PC can be connected tony Ethernet interface when thearameter definitions enable reachingn equipment to be operated

28

15

(t

d,nemb

rs

s re

, or

u

ut ST

1 – D3n STM16 East

1 – D34-D6n STM16 East

theripment

8 113 969-01Page A2-5

5c and other

he addressing

the PPI ports,ed to have aner of required

» « Interfaces

quired :

to a FOT 155c

sed on these

ilization of twoM-n link.



2.1.4 - Description of DCC transparency function

The transparency functionality of the DCC flows (D1-D3, D4-D6) allows to transport, in an ADRnetwork, the management flows in transparency of another operator by using the DCCr (D1-D3). Themanagement flows must be to the HDLC format.

In an heterogeneous network of ADR155c, ADR155CPE, ADR2500c or eXtra and no-ADR equipment :• the ADR equipment management is transported through the DCCm of the ADR and of the

management VC12 when they must cross a network of no-ADR.• the no-ADR management is transported through the DCCr of the ADR when they must cross a

network of ADR.

The DCCm of ADR155c and of ADR155CPE are not compatible with those of ADR2500 eXtra ; theirrates are différent.

The transparency of the DCC is independent of the protection mechanisms. The operator must use amechanism of routage to protect its path of DCC.

The transparency of the DCCr and DCCr is only configurable by HTTP and is always bi-directional

The system of transparency does not go up alarm or information on the state of the transported flow.



2.1.5 - Defining parameters for IP address and Ethernet port

Connect the "COMM" access to a free "COM" port on the PC with VT100 emulation.

Switch on the PC.

If it is the first time you have run the HyperTerminal application on this PC, process asfollowing :

• successively select, in the Windows desktop, the Start, Programs, Accessories andHyperterminal buttons

• select the icon representing the Hyperterminal application : a description window for theapplication is displayed

• enter a name and choose an icon for the connection, then validate your choices : a newwindow is displayed

• select the "COM" port on the PC which is connected to the equipment then validate yourchoice. A new window is displayed

• configure the port parameters as indicated below : Bits per second : 19200 Data bits : 8 Parity : none Stop bits : 1 Flow control : none

• validate the programming.

• save the connection ("Save" command in application File menu).

NOTE : The next time you want to open the "Hyperterminal" application, you will simplyneed to choose the connection icon to connect to the equipment. Once the equipment ispowered up, the operation menu is displayed.

• to exit the "Hyperterminal" application, select Exit in the File menu.

Open a session and enter your password (to configure the communication function, it isnecessary to have "supervisor" rights)

NOTE : by default, for the initial commissioning procedure, the password is empty.



The following screen is displayed :

To select a command, type the command number in the "Choice ?" text area and press the"ENTER" key to validate your choice.

> Choice "1" : Configuration of equipment IP address.

The IP address must be different from that of the other equipment and must be defined in adifferent subnetwork of the one of the Ethernet.The default value 000.000.000.000 corresponds to no configuration of the IP address.When the IP address exists and is modified, equipment REBOOT is proposed. ThisREBOOT operates itself without affecting the trafic.



Error message "Equipment address is mandatory" : the equipment address is mandatorywhen at least one PPP link is not numbered.

> Choice "2" : Configuration of Ethernet interface.

The above screen presents an Ethernet communication interface with its characteristics :"Interface State" : choice of interface state : 0 (Interface off) or 1 (Interface on)."IP Address" : IP address (default adress : 135.10.114.11)"Subnet mask" : sub-network mask."Route Protocol" : protocol : 0 (None), 1 (RIP) or 2 (OSPF)

The addresses of the gateway and no gateway equipment must be defined in differentsubnetworks.When the IP address exists and is modified, equipment REBOOT is proposed. ThisREBOOT operates itself without affecting the trafic.

> Choice "3" : choice of equipment REBOOT.This command is used to immediately reboot the application and restart with the parametersalready stored in the equipment.This REBOOT is performed with no impact on the traffic.

> Choice "4" : Logout / DisconnectionOnce the parameter definition process is completed, this command closes the currentsession.An automatic session exit is performed after a few minutes if no activity is detected (this timeperiod can be configured using the manager).



> Choice "5" : Ping.

"IP Address" : Choice of IP address of equipment to be contacted.Round trip time in msNOTE : The Ping command is used to check the accessibility and the return path from theremote equipment by testing both the address of the interface and the address of thisequipment. If the address of the port by which the Ping command is generated is differentfrom the address of the equipment, two commands are generated.

> Choice "6" : Trace route.

"IP Address" : choice of IP address of equipment to be contacted.



The screen displays the management routes already defined with their characteristics :

Hops : hop 1, 2, 3…Path to go from one machine to another.

IP address : IP address of recipient (equipment or sub-network).

Delay (ms) : round trip time.

Unit. size : Maximum size of IP packet which can reach to the remote equipment.

2.1.6 - Using the Web browser

2.1.6.1 - Browser configuration

IE 5.5 and IE 6.0 configurations

1. In the Internet Explorer Tools menu, click Internet options.

2. In the General tab, click Parameters.

3. Tick the radio button : On each page visit, then define the disk space to be used for1 Mbyte. Click [OK].

4. In the Temporary Internet files tab, click Delete Files.

5. Tick Delete all offline content, then click [OK].

6. In the Internet options dialog box, click [OK], then close the IE browser to allow the optionsto be acknowledged.

The Automatic cache option with a disk space of 30 Mbytes provides for much faster operationto display the pages.

With IE 6. 0, it is possible to configure the level of confidentiality, that is to say the choice of thecookies type that is allowed to copy on the target PC. To open the ADRs, it is necessary to letthe parameter of confidentiality of Internet to the default value "Medium" for the access to theWeb sites.

With IE6. 0 and a PC equipped of Windows XP SP2, the installed Center of Security modifiesthe manner of which IE displays the HTTP windows. In order to correctly open an ADR, it isnecessary to untick the parameter "Block pop-ups" of the tab " Privacy" of IE properties .

In the same way, the installed Center of Security blocks the program Tftpd32 used by the ADRsfor the Upload and the Download. On the warning window , to click on the button "Unblock" : thisaction adds the program tftpd32 in the list of exceptions.

321



Remark

After an upgrade (application code + HTTP custom), the cache must be cleared as following :

In the Internet Explorer "Tools" menu click "Internet Options / General tab / Temporary Internetfiles tab / Delete Files"

Tick "Delete all offline content", then click "OK".

Then close and start again the Browser.

PC Configuration

To get a correct date for the equipment HTTP, the environment variable "TZ" must not bedefined. To list all environment variables, type "Set" in the MS DOS console.

Otherwise, to get a correct display of HTML pages, fonts must not be defined as "large" indisplay properties of the configuration panel and the Webdings police must be installed.

2.1.6.2 - Initial commissioning

The PC is connected via the Ethernet (the PC's gateway must be in the same subnetwork as theEthernet interface of the ADR).

1. Run the INTERNET EXPLORER 5.5 or 6.0 application.

2. In the Address field of the home screen, enter the IP address for the ADR2500 eXtra equipment, the browser home screen is displayed : Welcome on the ADR2500 eXtra's site.

3. On initial commissioning, the password is empty. Click on [Apply] to access the screen :ADR2500 eXtra shelf view.

The web browser is now operational.

2.1.6.3 - Menus tree

See following Figure 2-4 : Menus tree


Installation and User Guide- 288 113 969-01 Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A2-13

DS

" TRIB – GFP150 eXtra" Menu

MonitoringService

Expected CardPerformanceBoard status

Global ParamsETH

SwitchVCGLPT

OAM CCMSTP

MaintenanceMonitoring

ServiceExpected CardBoard Status

TC ListTC Performance

Session

InformationLogin

Logout

Synchronization

T0T4

Connection

ConfigurationDelete

Multiple connectionsHO LevelLO Level

LPOM List

Current Alarms

New Windows

"PSU" Menu

"CCU-2G" Menu "CTRL-2G" Menu


Expected CardBoard status

Board statusAlarmsLoops

Synchronization

MonitoringBoard statusIP Parameters

DCC Connection

"EXT– AUX" Menu

"SWITCH HO/LO" Menu

"FAN-2G" Menu

MonitoringService

Expected cardBoard status

AUX

MonitoringAlarms

Board status

Aux

ConfigurationDelete

Polling

MonitoringService


TR RECSettings


ServiceExpected CardPerformanceBoard status

1 TR REC2 TR REC3 TR REC4 TR REC

"TRIB – STM1" Menu "TRIB or Line – STM4" Menu



TR REC

Main Menu

"TR REC" Menu

SFPSPI / RST / MST

MSP / MS-SPRingMSA / HPT /HPOM

HPA / LPOM

SFP block for STMn-SFP cards "MS-SPRing" block accessible if

selected and for STM16 card in " Line" slot

"EMPTY" Menu

MonitoringService

Expected CardBoard status

"TRIB or LINE – STM16" Menu



TR REC

"TR REC" Menu

WANHPTVCGGFP

Access

"TRIB or LINE – GIG-E" Menu

Shelf view / Equipment

NameDate and Time

InventoriesSecurity

ManagementUpload Download

Failure hold off/on timeWTR

Event LogsPerformanceCapabilities

"LTU21E1" Menu


ServiceExpected CardBoard status

E1 ports

"LTU3E3DS3" Menu


ServiceExpected CardBoard status1/2/3 TR REC

E3/DS3

MonitoringService


PDH Board Protection (*)LPT (**)

E1 Retiming (**)

"TRIB – 63E1" Menu

MonitoringService


PDH Board Protection (*)LPT (**)

"TRIB – 3E3DS3" Menu

(*) If the card is inserted in TRIB 1(3E3DS3) or TRB 2 (63E1) (**) If the card is configured in workingmode

"TRIB – 3E3DS3FA" Menu


ServiceExpected CardPerformanceBoard status1/2/3 TR REC

E3/DS3



E1 PortsE1 Retiming

"TRIB – 63E1FA" Menu

"TRIB ou LINE – xGE-DMMenu "

MonitoringService


SFP(on SFP card)

ETHVCGHPT

Figure 2-4 : Menus tree



2.1.6.4 - Presentation of the Graphical User Interface

When a session is opened on the web browser, the "Shelf view" screen (

Figure 2-5) is displayed with a general view of the equipment, in which each slot is marked withits name in bottom (left for FAN-2G ) : LTU x-y, PSU 1-2-3, CCU, CTRL, EXT 1-2, TRIB 1-8,LINE 1-2, SWITCH 1-2, FAN.Click on "LTU" to visualize the LTU strip, click on "Shelf" to visualize the cards of the shelf.

Figure 2-5 : «Shelf view » screen of web browser



This screen is used to display the status of the equipment, in particular :

• the inconsistencies between configuration and composition, the card status ; each slotdisplays an info bubble including- the name of the expected card : always present information- the card status : present information if default card (board missing, board mismatch,defective board)- the name of the inserted card : present information if the inserted card in the shelf isdifferent of the one programmed on the GUI

• each card presents on bottom an horizontal border (vertical border on left for FAN-2G)which is colored grey if the card is not monitored, red in case of insertion alarm (Missing,Mismatch, Defective). For FAN-2G, the coloration can also reflects the state of the alarmscard.

• the connectors in the modules with a critical alarm condition are colored according to theseverity of the most serious alarm.

• the present and configured out of service modules include an icon representing a red X toindicate this administrative status

• the present and configured on maintenance modules include an icon representing acaution to indicate this administrative status

• the "Status" and "Traffic" LEDs of the cards, and the "ALM" LEDs of the CTRL-2G card aredynamic devices.Their meaning is specified to § 2.2.3.4 :

• The MSP, MS-SPRing and PDH Cards protections, the TC connections are indicated onlabels of information that appear then on the concerned cards.

This screen is also used to :

• have informations on the session :

- red information of "No Session" and "Login" link- opened grey padlock if the writing session is not locked, closed red if the writing sessionis locked by another user, closed green if the writing session is locked the user.

• navigate using the info bubble buttons "Refresh", "Stop", "Previous", "Next"

• reach help using the info bubble button"Help"

• visualize the release and the current packs using the info bubble button"About"

• at any moment return on the "Shelf view" screen using the info bubble icon "Shelf view"

• display the "Equipment" menu and its items on the left of the screen, at the same time thatthe visualization of the shelf

• activate the common functions of the equipment (such as synchronization, security, trafficinformation, etc.) by clicking on a function on the main menu bar located above theequipment view. This opens a sub-menu on the left of the screen :see Figure 2-4 : Menus Tree



• access the functions related to a specific module (for example, MS-SPRing protectionfunction in the case of a line STM-16 module) : by clicking on the module to be selected, itsspecific menu appears on the left of the screen according to the type of card :see Figure 2-4 : Menus Tree

• display the characteristics specific to an access (connections made, connectionconfiguration, status of alarms, etc.) by selecting the corresponding connector.

For each displayed function, the configuration parameters, operating controls, active parametersand status of the alarms are grouped on the same screen ; the various possible actions areaccessible (or not) to the operator depending on the operator's authorization level.

The browser window heading indicates the equipment name, its IP address and the grantedauthorization level.

A mini view, located on the right top of the screen, indicates the cards which present alarms :

- colored grey slot : no monitored

- colored light yellow slot : warning alarm

- colored yellow slot : minor alarm

- colored red slot : major alarm

- colored magenta slot : magenta alarm

- colored white slot : monitored slot and no alarm

When a slot is colored on this mini view, click on the info bubble button "Refresh" to make appearthe alarm's indications on the Equipment shelf view

This mini view is automatically refreshed according to a defined frequency in the "Polling" menu.



2.2 - OPERATION

2.2.1 - Functional description

The ADR2500 eXtra is an STM-16 optical add-drop multiplexer used to build STM-16 point-to-point links, STM-16 rings or meshed networks.

The ADR2500 eXtra can also be connected to an equipment of the synchronous digital hierarchycomplying with G.707 and G.783 recommendations of ITU-T standard.

The ADR2500 eXtra modelling into functional blocks according to G.783 standard is as following :

SFP : Small Form Factor Pluggable

SPI : Synchronous Physical Interface

RST : Regenerator Section Termination OHA : OverHead Access

MST : Multiplex Section Termination

MSP : Multiplex Section Protection SETS : Synchronous EquipmentTiming Source

MS-SPRing on two fibers SETPI : Synchronous Equipmentsynchronization Physical Interface

MSA : Multiplex Section Adaptation SEMF : Synchronous EquipmentManagement Function

HPOM : High order Path Overhead Monitoring

HPC : High order Path Connection

MCF : Message CommunicationFunction

HPT : High order Path Ternination

HPA : High order Path Adaptation

LUG : Lower order path Unequipped Generator GFP - Frame

LPOM : Lower order Path Overhead Monitor VCAT

LPC Lower order Path Connection LCAS

LPT : Lower order Path Ternination

LPA : Lower order Path Adaptation(VC12)

Lower order Path Adaptation(VC3)

PPI : Plesiochronous PhysicalInterface (VC12)

Plesiochronous PhysicalInterface (VC3)

Table 2-2 : Functional blocks of ADR2500 eXtra

2.2.2 - General information

Operation and maintenance of the ADR2500 eXtra is performed :

• either directly on the equipment, by means of the front panel indicator LEDs and of the twotechnical management outgoing loops (A and B loops),

• or, using a PC equipped with a web browser,



• or, from a network manager using the SNMP protocol for the network and supervisionaspects, and the included web browser.

The IONOS-NMS management software provides an efficient and comprehensive networkadministration solution for SAGEM systems ADR 155C, ADR155CPE, ADR 2500c andADR2500 eXtra (refer to IONOS-NMS installation and user guide).

The equipment management functions (EMS) are developed at network administration level(NML) in accordance with the telecommunications network architecture (TMN) :

• point-to-point trail configuration,

• management of alarms appearing on links,

• management of protection systems : MSP, MS-SPRing (only for ADR 2500c and ADR2500eXtra), SNC-P.

2.2.3 - Operation parameters

The operation parameters comprise :

• the configuration parameters,

• the maintenance commands or operations (these actions are cleared in case of powersupply loss)

• the alarms and their severity level.

Configuration parameters

The enclosed tables (Tables 2-3 to 2-5 : Network configuration parameters and Tables 2-6 to2-25 : Equipment configuration parameters show the configuration functions.

The "Access and Parameter Path" column indicates :

• the access paths (in bold italic) from the main menu functions (Figure 2-4 : Menus tree) orfrom the selected card in the equipment view (

• Figure 2-5 : «Shelf view » screen of web browser)

• Ex : Connection menu > Output port > Configuration or Multiple Connections

• The parameters to be defined, (bold between quotes) :

• Ex : "Login" in Session menu

Configuration constraints

When configuring the name (Equipment > Name menu), you are limited to using upper and lowercase characters, numbers, the space and the – and _ characters.

Accented characters and certain special characters will not be displayed on the VT100 interface.

The configuration downloads on the equipment (download all database) must be realized onlywith absence of default on the equipment, without switched protection. If the MS-SPRingprotection is set on the equipment, this restraint is expanded to the absence of default or forcedoperation on the STM-16 ring.



2.2.3.1 - Network Configuration Parameters

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueConnection Connection matrix

(SWITCH HO/LO card,HPC, LPC)

Menu : Connection > Output port > Configuration or MultipleConnections No connection

"VC Type" or "VC-n type" type, unidirectional or bi-directionalConnections of VC12, VC3 LO, VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-16c HO"Input Port" or "First Input Port"The dropdown list depends on the declared cards in the shelf."Name"Identifications of the connection None"Activate TC" and "TC Configuration" linkto set connections and parameters associated to TCM function

No ticked

Protection Ring protectionmechanisms

Menu : Connection > Output port > Configuration Usable on a remoteconnection

SNC protection Protection of VC12, VC3, VC4, VC4-4c, VC4-16c paths Non in service"Status" : traffic status.Protection status reading (channel used, cause of switchover)"Revertive" Reversibility authorization for each path : return, after a WTR period, tonormal link when fault (SF or SD) has disappeared

No

"WTR"WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revertive" mode, waiting time forreturn to normal link.WTR programmable value for each path from 30 to 900 s in 1s steps

60 s

“Hold Off Time”Persistence value programmable for each path from 0 to 10 s in 1/10 ssteps.For SNC/N, take account of the SD created by the end of the SF.

0 ms

Table 2-3 : Network configuration parameters



Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value"SNC Type" :* SNC/I : the protection criteria are tu-lop and tu-ais for VC12/VC3, au-lop and au-ais for VC4)* SNC/N : SNC/I + SD criteria only : HO SD (VC4 B3) for VC4, LO SD (VC3 B3) for VC3, LO SD (V5) for VC12, Other criteria are not supplied). For VC12 and VC3 the number of SNC/N is limited to 28.

SNC/I

"Protection Input Port" Definition of the assistance portThe dropdown list depends on the declared cards in the shelf

No protection

"Operation"Operator action by path and by order of priority :Clear (Forced operation cancel),Lockout of protection,Forced Switch to Working,Forced Switch to Protection,Manual Switch to Working,Manual Switch to ProtectionSwap SNC : swap the working and protection input ports

Clear

MS-SPRing protectionon optical STM-16 line

Card menu : LINE 1 and 2 > TR REC > MSP/MS-SPRing > MS-SPRing

“MS-SPRing ”Activation or not Off"NE ID"Identification number ; values : none, 0 to 15 None"WTR" WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revertive" mode, waiting time forreturn to normal linkConfigurable value from 30 to 900s in 1s steps

300 s




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value“Multiple Ring Switch Handling”Type of operation.Not selected : single fault ; Selected : double fault

No selected

"Operation" West and EastOperator command by order of priority :Clear (Forced operation cancel),Forced Switch,Manual Switch

Clear

"Fault"Alarms related to MS-SPRing"Status"Status of traffic on ring (normal/protection)"Node Configuration"Configuration of the identification N° ; values : none, 0 to 15. None"Topology map"16 elements topology map with values : none, 0 to 15 None"Misconnection map"Signal cancellation map with (topological) addresses of nodes in whichAU4 traffic (passing through a time interval) enters and exits the ring.Values : none, 0 to 15

None

"Nut map"8 elements map that identifies the configured AUs as Non-preemptibleUnprotected traffic.

Disable




2.2.3.2 - Equipment Configuration Parameters

Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueShelfconfiguration

Equipment choiceConfiguration ofequipment name

Menu : Equipment > Name None

Configuration ofequipment date and time

Menu : Equipment > Date and time

“Equipment Date and Time” by applying “PC Date and Time” DD/MM/YYYY hh:mn:ss

Reading hardwareinventories of insertedsub-assemblies

Menu Equipment > Inventories > Hardware

Reading softwareinventories of insertedsub-assemblies

Menu: Equipment > Inventories > SoftwareCurrent application codes and FPGA

Backup anddownloading

Menu : Equipment > Upload/Download

Backup all configuration Upload > All Database (type of uploaded information)Backup of all equipment configuration (Shelf + Network + Management)

Backup "Shelf"configuration

Upload > Shelf database (type of uploaded informationsBackup of shelf configuration (cards, alarms, performances, connections,protection, synchronization)

Backup "Network"configuration

Upload > Network Database (type of uploaded informations)Backup of management network parameters (PPP, IP address, routingProtocols)

Table 2-6 : Equipment configuration parameters



Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueBackup "Management"configuration

Upload > Management Database (type of uploaded informations)Backup of parameters required by management(list of managers, trap recipients, etc.)

Download allconfiguration

Download > All Database (type of downloaded informations)Restoration of all equipment configuration (Shelf + Network +Management).

Download "Shelf"configuration

Download > Shelf database (type of downloaded informations)Restoration of shelf configuration (cards, alarms, performances,connections, protection, synchronization)

Download "Network"configuration

Download > Network database (type of downloaded informations)Restoration of management network parameters (PPP, IP address,routing protocols)

Download"Management"configuration

Download > Management database (type of downloaded informations)Restoration of parameters required by management (list of Managers,trap recipients)

Download codes andcustomization ofequipment except thoseof GIG-E and GFP150eXtra cards

Download > Shelf Pack (type of downloaded informations)Download of whole codes in reserve bank in flash (Software, FPGA,customization) forf all the cards which can be found in the equipmentexcept GIG-E and GFP150 eXtra .The current codes are saved in current banque in flash. Switchover todownloaded new codes takes place following a manual command byoperator.

Download codes ofGIG-E cards

Download > GIG-E Pack (type of downloaded informations)Download of whole codes (Software, FPGA) of GIG-E card in reservebank in flash.The current codes are saved in current banque in flash. Switchover todownloaded new code takes place following a manual command byoperator.




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueDownload codes ofGFP150 eXtra cards

Download > GFP150-eXtra Pack (type of downloaded informations)Download of whole codes (Software, FPGA) of GFP150 eXtra card inreserve bank in flash.The current codes are saved in current banque in flash. Switchover todownloaded new code takes place following a manual command byoperator.

Apply defaultconfiguration

Switching > Take effectDefault Configuration : application of default configurations (severitiesand monitoring alarms, quality thresholds) on all equipment

Switchover on reservecodes

Switching > Switch (Next card reset will apply selected version)GIG-E Pack : Switchover to GIG-E reserve codeGFP150-eXtra Pack : Switchover to GFP150 eXtra reserve code

Switchover on reservecodes and application

Switching > Switch and resetShelf Pack : Switchover to equipment reserve codes then application byresetGIG-E Pack_ :Switchover to GIG-E reserve codes then application by resetGFP150-eXtra Pack_ :Switchover to GFP150 eXtra reserve codes then application by reset

IP addressing Menu : CTRL-2G card > IP ParametersAlarms Used to configure monitoring and severity of management interface

alarms.Eth : minorPPP : minor

Interfaces Summary of management interface configurations (Eth and PPP)Reading of Ethernet port informationReading of STM-n / DCCr / DCCm / VC12 port information

@ ETH : 135.10.114.11

Routing table Summary of routing tablesGlobal Parameters Equipment management IP address

RIP routingOSPF

0.0.0.001

Interfaces Configuration PPP interfaces configurationStatic RoutesConfiguration

Equipment static routes configuration




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueSynchronization Synchronization sources

and propagationconfiguration

Menu : Synchronization

T0 Synchronization"Name"T3_1T3_2T2_LTU x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1 card)T2_LTU x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1 card)T2_TRIB x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1FA card)T2_TRIB x:y (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1FA card)T1_TRIB x:yT1_TRIB x:yT1_LINE 1T1_LINE 2"SSm" (Synchronization Status Message)Use of synchronization status messages

True

"Quality provided" (when "SSM" is "false")Quality level of potential sources :PRC (Primary Reference Clock),SSUT (Synchronization Supply Unit Transit),SSUL (Synchronization Supply Unit Local),SEC (Synchronization Equipment Clock),DNU (Do Not Use)

T3_1 = PRCT3_2 = PRCT2_LTU x:y = SECT2_LTU x:y = SECT1_LINE 1:1 =SECT1_LINE 2:1 = SECT1_TRIB x:y = SECT1_TRIB x:y = SEC

"T0 priority"Priority table of T0 according to sources declared.Possible values from P1 to P8 and disable (dis).Possible sources :2 sources T1 extracted from incoming tributary access points STM-1,STM-4, STM-162 sources T1 extracted from incoming line access points STM-162 sources T2 extracted from 2 Mbit/s incoming access points2 sources T3, external, 2MHz G.703

T3_1 = p1T3_2 = disT2_LTU x:y = disT2_LTU x:y = disT1_LINE 1:1 = p2T1_LINE 2:1 = p3T1_TRIB x:y = disT1_TRIB x:y = dis




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value"LOS Severity"Alarm severity associated to the source status .

Warning for T1_Line,T1_Trib and T2Minor for T3

T0 Synchronization Holdover in case of automatic mode and no valid source

"Mode"Synchronization operating mode.Choice between "Automatic" and "Free-run"

Automatic

"Command"Operator action : manual switchover, forced operation or clear to beconfigured

Clear

"Revert"Reversibility authorization common to all sources : return, after a WTR, tonormal link when default (SF or SD) causing switchover has disappeared.

True

"WTR"WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revert" mode, waiting time forreturn to normal link. Common value to all programmable sources from30 to 900 s in 1s steps

60 sec

"Sync Freq Out of Range SeverityAlarm severity associated to the T0 output frequency Minor

T4 Synchronization"Active source" Selected source : None, T0 and each T1 source None"Minimum Quality" Quality threshold for T4. Choice between :PRC (Primary Reference Clock),SSUT (Synchronization Supply Unit Transit),SSUL (Synchronization Supply Unit Local),SEC (Synchronization Equipment Clock)

PRC




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value"Sase" Mode control : activation / deactivation ;If activation : choice of T3 source between T3_1 and T3_2

FalseT3_1

"LOS T4 Severity"Alarm severity associated to the T4 output status. Minor

Cardsconfiguration

Declaration of cardspresence and card typeby slot

Card menu > Expected card : declaration of status of LTU, SWITCH,LINE, TRIB, AUX, PSU slots. A slot can be configured empty or with anexpected card

EMPTY

Card monitoring Card menu > MonitoringA non-monitored card is made grey in the equipment view. When a cardis not monitored, all relative events to the alarms on the card (card andaccess points) are inhibited. The performance data is logged whateverthe configured monitoring mode.

Monitoring

Disconnection of a card Card menu > Service The disconnected module is ignored by the management function. Theconfiguration modifications requested are stored but are not implemented.

In service

SFP modules Card menu : STM-n SFP > TR REC > SFP >"Expected SFP"Card menu : 2GE-DM SFP > SFP >"Expected SFP"Choice of the expected SFP module

EMPTY

34 or 45 Mbit/s Port Card menu LTUE3DS3 or 3E3DS3FA > E3/DS3"E3 (34M)" or "DS3 (45M)"34 or 45 Mbit/s physical interface selection

"E3 (34M)"

"Type of cable" (DS3/45Mbit/s mode only"long" or "short" (length < 225 ft or 70m)Connecting cable length selection so that transmitted pulse complies totemplate defined in Bellcore GR-489-CORE standard

"short"




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueE1 Retiming Card menu : 63E1 or 63E1FA > E1 Retiming

Selection of the retiming function :- on the first and the second ports of each LTU associated with a 63E1card- on the #1 to # 6 ports of each 63E1FA card(maximum 6 E1 retiming functions by 63E1 or 63E1FA card)

Disable

Protection MSP(*)optical or electrical STM-n access points

Card menu : LINE or TRIB > TR REC > MSP/MS-SPRing > MSP

Type "1+0" or "1+1" 1+0 : non activated"Port’s MSP type"Choice between « Working » (normal) and « Protection » (backup) for theselected port"Port’s MSP Complément"Definition of the complementary port of the MSP couple"Revertive"Reversibility authorization : return, after a WTR, to the normal link whenthe fault (SF or SD) which caused the switchover has disappeared.Choice between « Yes » and « No »

Yes

"Mode"Protection mode. Choice between unidirectional or bi-directional Bidir."WTR"WTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revert" mode, waiting time forreturn to normal link. Common value to all programmable sources from30 to 900 s in 1s steps

900 sec

"Hold off time"Persistence value, configurable from 0 to 10 s in 1/10s steps 0 s


(*) In case of a MSP protection created on STM-16 LINE interfaces, two PPP links (one per port) need to be created. In case of a MSP protection created on STM-n TRIB interfaces, one PPP link is needed, created on the « Working » port.



Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value"Sf / Sd priority"Value "High-G783" or "Low" Low"Operation"Operator command by order of priority :Clear (Cancel forced operation),Lockout of protection,Forced switch to Working,Forced switch to Protection,Manual switch to Working,Manual switch to Protection

Clear

"Fault"Alarms related to MSP"Status"Traffic status

WTR Configuration Menu Equipment > WTRWTR period (Wait Time to Restore) : in "Revert" mode, waiting time forreturn to normal link. Programmable value from 30 to 900 s in 1s stepsGlobal MSP WTR : Default configuration of the WTR for all the MSPprotectionsGlobal SNC WTR : Default configuration of the WTR for all the SNCprotections

900s

60s

PDH cardsProtection configuration

Card menu : TRIB 1-2 > PDH Board Protection

"No Protection" : the PDH card is used in working mode and the LTUwindow allows to associate it at a free LTU card"1:n" : the PDH card is used in protection mode and the "Board toProtect" windows allow to configure the cards to be protected (maximun 4cards in TRIB 5 to TRIB 8)

"No Protection"




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value"Operation"Operator commands :Clear (Cancel forced operation),Lockout of protection (protection is forbidden),Forced Switch TRIB x to Protection (Traffic is routed on Protection card),Manual Switch to Working (Manual switching of traffic on working card).

Clear

Service channel Order Wire E1 –Auxiliary channel F1

Card menu : EXT > AUX > Output port > Configuration No connection

"Type" : Choice between "E1" and "F1"4 terminations max. and 6 outputs (E1 or F1), contra-directional master"Input Port"The dropdown list depends on the declared cards in the shelf."Name"Identification of the order wire

DCCTransparency

Card menu CTRL-2G > DCC Connection"DCC Type" : Choice between "D1-D3" and "D4-D6"Max 16 transparencies on a SWITCH HO/LO card and max 5transparencies on a SW32 HOLO card

No connection

Loops Card menu : CCU-2G > LoopsUsed to configure severity and name of 4 incoming loops and 2 outgoingloops, closure criteria for these 2 last, the "Central Site" option and theparameters of the loops deport function

User Input x (x = 1 to 4)User Output x (x = 1 to 2)

Power supply Card menu : CCU-2G > AlarmsUsed to configure monitoring and severity of 48V#1, 48V#2 and 48VSalarms.




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueAlarms Severity Card menu : LTU, TRIB 1-8 and LINE 1-2 > TR REC or E1 ports or LPT

or HPT or VCGCard menu : FAN-2G > AlarmsCard menu : CCU-2G > Alarms or Loops or SynchronizationCard menu : CTRL-2G > IP Parameters > AlarmsCard menu : SWITCH > TC List > TC ConfigurationSeverity configuration. The severity level of each alarm can be configuredseparately with the following attributes :"Critical""Major""Minor""Warning""Critical-inv""Major-inv""Minor-inv""Warning-inv"

Monitor Card menu : LTU, TRIB 1-8 and LINE 1-2 > TR REC or E1 ports or LPTor HPT or VCGThe alarms can be monitored by block :- SFP, SPI, RST, MST, MSP, MS-SPRing, MSA, HPT, HPOM, HPA,LPOM. for the optical or electrical STM-n access points- LPT, PPI for the 2/34/45 Mbit/s access points- HPT, LPT, VCG, ETH, GFP, Access for the DATA cards

Monitoring




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueThresholdsPath Traces

> SPI / RST / MST > RST :- management of EBER B1 (10-5 ) alarm- "TIMdis" (Trace Identifier Mismatch) : enable or disable- configuration of J0 PathTrace- "Autodiscovery" (*) enable or disableEnable : allows to generate automatically the Trace Sent in order toenable an autodiscovery of equipment and networking by a networkmanagement (**)

DisableClicked (no TIM)UNNAMED RS

Auto

> SPI / RST / MST > MST- management of EBER B2 (10-3 ) alarm- configuration of SD B2 threshold (10-5 to 10-9)- management of REI alarm and configuration of threshold (10-4 to 10-9)

Enable10-6

Disable / 10-6

> HPT/HPOM or HPT- management of EBER B3 (10-5) alarm for VC4- configuration of SD B3 threshold (10-5 to 10-9) for VC4- management of REI alarm for VC4 and configuration of threshold (10-4 to 10-9)- "TIMdis" (Trace Identifier Mismatch) : enable or disable- configuration of J1 PathTrace for VC4

Enable10-6

Disable10-6

Clicked (no TIM)UNNAMED VC

> HPA/LPOM or LPT- management of EBER B3 (10-3) alarm for VC3 or EBER V5 (10-3) alarm for VC12- configuration of SD B3 threshold for VC3 or SD V5 threshold for VC12 (10-5 to 10-9)

- management of REI G1 alarm for VC3 or REI V5 alarm for VC12 and configuration of threshold (10-4 to 10-9)- "TIMdis" (Trace Identifier Mismatch : enable or disable- configuration of PathTraces: J1 for VC3 or J2 for VC12

Enable

10-6

Disable10-6

Clicked (no TIM)UNNAMED VCGFP FRAMED VC3 orVC12 (GFP150 eXtra)


(*) AUTO = XXXXXXXX_**Y:01 (XXXXXXXX corresponds to the IP management address converted in hexadecimal, Y corresponds to the slot in which thecard is inserted(**) In case of interconnection between an ADR2500 eXtra and an ADR10000, Autodiscovery must be unclicked and J0 programmed at " UNNAMED RS"



Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valuePath TraceTCM Connections

Card menu : SWITCH > TC List > TC Configuration for VC4 TCconnections- configuration of N1 PathTraces- management of APIM alarm

TC TRACE Disable

Labels > HPT/HPOM or HPT or LPT or LPOMConfiguration of C2 label for VC4 and VC3 or V5 label for VC12 (the sentor expected value "Unspecified" should be used only in case ofinterworking problem)

Persistence Menu : Equipment > Failure Hold off/on timePersistence Configuration .Persistence for the appearance : X = 0, 1, 3, 10 or 30sPersistence for the disappearance : Y = 0, 1, 3, 10 or 30s

X = 3 sY = 3 s

Acknowledgement Acknowledgement of major and minor alarms output loops by pushbuttonon front panel of CTRL-2G card.

Visualisation of alarmsand events log Menu : Equipment > Event Logs

Visualisation ofcurrent alarms Menu : Current Alarms

RESET alarms andevents log Menu : Equipment > Event Logs > Clear All

Performance Logsoptical or electricalSTM-n, 2/34/45 Mbit/s,Fast Ethernet,GigaEthernet (xGE-DMcard) access points, TCConnections

Card menu : TRIB 1-8 and LINE 1-2 > Performance > VC12 Near orVC12 Far or VC3 Near or VC3 Far or VC4 Near or VC4 Far or MSTNEAR or MST FAR or RST NEARCard menu : SWITCH HO/LO >TC Performance > IEC Near

Displays performance log for the selected monitoring point as following :- the 15 mn different from 0 counters (1 current and 16 saved)- the 24 H different from 0 counters (1 current and 1 saved)- the different from 0 unavailability periods ( until 6 max)Gives access to Reset and threshold configuration sub-menus.




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueOption Clear current counters for this pointClears current 15 mn and 24 H counters of selected pointOption Clear all counters for this pointClears all counters for selected pointOption Counters configurationConfigures the 15 mn and 24 H thresholds for the selected point.

VC12 BBE : 9 000 , 12 000 ES : 120 , 350 SES : 15 , 20 UAS : 10 , 10VC3 BBE : 36 000 , 48 000 ES : 150 , 600 SES : 15 , 20 UAS : 10 , 10VC4 / IEC BBE : 36 000 , 48 000 ES : 180 , 1500 SES : 15 , 20 UAS : 10 , 10MST BBE : 288 000 , 432 000 ES : 50 , 150 SES : 10 , 15 UAS : 10 , 10RST BBE : 9 000, 48 000 ES : 180, 1500 SES : 15 , 20 UAS : 10,10




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueLogs GigaEthernetaccess points (GIG-Ecard)

Card menu : TRIB 3-4 and LINE 1-2 > Performance > LAN, QoS or GFP

Displays GigaEthernet access (LAN), GFP layer and quality of servicetreatment (QoS) performance log.Gives access to Reset sub-menusOption Clear statistics counters for this layerClears specific counters to the selected entity (LAN, QoS or GFP)Option Clear all statistics countersClears all counters LAN, QoS and GFPCard menu : TRIB 3-4 and LINE 1-2 > Performance > VC4 Near , VC4FarDisplays performance log for the selected monitoring point as following :- the 15 mn different from 0 counters (1 current and 16 saved)- the 24 H different from 0 counters (1 current and 1 saved)- the different from 0 unavailability periods ( until 6 max)Gives access to Reset and threshold configuration sub-menus.Option Clear current counters for this pointClears current 15 mn and 24 H counters of selected pointOption Clear all counters for this pointClears all counters of selected point

Option Counters configurationConfigures the 15 mn and 24 H thresholds for the selected point.

VC4 BBE : 36 000 , 48 000 ES : 180 , 1500 SES : 15 , 20 UAS : 10 , 10




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueLogsEquipment

Menu : Equipment > Performance

> 15 Minutes CountersDisplays all the 15 mn different from 0 counters for all the monitoringpoints of the equipment> 24 Hours CountersDisplays all the 24 H no different from 0 counters for all the monitoringpoints of the equipment> Unavailable PeriodsDisplays all the different from 0 unavailability periods of the equipmentOption Clear all current countersClears current counter for all monitoring points.Option Clear all counters & restart 15 mnClears all current counters for all monitoring points and restarts the 15Minperiod.

Security Session Menu : Session"Session Information"Informations on current session" Session-Login"Enters session. Requests for qualification.Restriction : only one authorized login for writing at a time" Session-Logout"Exits session subsequent to operator command or time-out

Authorized Managers Menu : Equipment > ManagementManagers List

"N° IP"IP addresses entry for the authorized stations to reach the equipment (10possible addresses) according to qualification.




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueChoice of a qualification class by increasing order of rights :- "Observer"- "Operator"- "Supervisor"The class is granted according to the password. It is displayed.Address of managers and levels authorized.Each manager is associated to a maximum qualification level.Ex. : Even with the Supervisor’s password, if the max level associated tothis IP address is "Operator", the granted level will be Operator.

Supervisor

Traps Managers Dest"Dest IP"Gives the list of recipient stations of the SNMP traps"Community"Authorization for transmission of traps to management : managers list.

Passwords Menu : Equipment > Security > Supervisor or Operator or Observer"New password" and "Confirm new password"One password per qualification class. Only Supervisor level is allowed tomodify password.

GigaEthernetSet-up

AdminStatus up Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > LANTraffic authorization on the LAN GigaEthernet interface Activated

Auto Negotiation Enable Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > LANSelf negotiation Mechanism Authorization for Pause mode Activated

Pause Capability Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > LANOperation Configuration for Pause mode if the self negotiationmechanism is not validated.

Non activated




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueQoS parameters Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > Pause Mode

Credit High Threshold : Over this threshold pause frames will be sent ;receiving a pause frame, the link partner will stop sending framesCredit Low Threshold : Under this threshold pause frames will no more besent ; the link partner will restart sending framesMonitor : allows or not « Pause Mode Rejected » alarm monitoringSee paragraph 2.2.10.3

60 %

10 %

Activated

Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > 802.1d PriorityClass : associated class to the field Priority of the 802.1q frameSee paragraph 2.2.10.1Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > IP V4 TOSClass : associated class to the field TOS of the IP V4 headerSee paragraph 2.2.10.1Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > IP V6 TClassClass : associated class to the field TClass of the IP V6 headerSee paragraph 2.2.10.1Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > VLAN IDClass 0 to Class 3 : allows the addition or deletion of one correspondancebetween a VLAN Id and a class - Item : identification number of the configuration - Range Size : number of configurated VLAN Id at which the class mustbe associated - First VLAN Id : first VLAN Id at which the class is associated - Last VLAN Id : last VLAN Id at which the class is associatedAll Classes : displays whole configuration dataSee paragraph 2.2.10.1




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valueRED Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > None

First Point Cross X : Over this threshold received frames dropping rate isproportional to buffer use rateSecond Point Cross X : Over this threshold all received frames aredroppedSee paragraph 2.2.10.3

20 %

90 %

WRED Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > IP V4 TOSProfile ConfigurationFirst profile or second profile see paragraph 2.2.10.3

First profile

Bandwidth Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > Settings > QoS > BalancedMin : defines the minimum guaranteed percentage of the bandwidth byclassMax : defines the maximum authorized percentage of the bandwidth byclassSee paragraph 2.2.10.2

WAN Configuration Card menu : GIG-E > TR REC > WANEnabled VCs number : configuration of the number of VCs constitutingthe GigaEthernet channel

GFP150 eXtraSet-up

For configuration of this card, refer to the chapter 7 of the present userguide

10/100 Mbps Accesspoints

Card menu : GFP150 eXtra > ETH > Interface Settings"100 Mbps Full"

"ifAdminStatus"Traffic authorization on the Ethernet interface Activated"Logical Interface"- UNI : client side interface- NNI untagged : non tagged network side interface- NNI tagged : tagged network side interface

UNI




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default value"Physical Interface"Choice of the "Automatic" (with autonegotiation) or "Manual" physicalinterface : 10/100 Mbps, Half/Full Duplex, Pause/No PauseIn "Automatic" the capabilities represent the local capacities of theequipement that are negotiated with the remote equipment. The result ofthis autonegotiation is visualisable in the Status " field ".In "Manual" no autonegotiation, the "Status" field reflects the operatorconfiguration.In order to have a correct link, it is recommended to configure both localand remote equipment Ethernet interfaces with the same configuration :- "Automatic" on both side or- "Manual" and same duplex/speed configuration on both sideNote : in "Automatic" mode, if the remote equipment is set to "Manual",local interface automatically switches to half duplex.

100 Mbps FullNo pause

"Connecting Interface"Adaptation according to the used cable : "Crossed", "Direct" or"Automatic"

Automatic

"Link Down Retransmit"In point to point mode (one VMAN constituted of one ETH + one VCG ineach equipment), "Enable" allows to report one ETH Down (or one VCGDown) on the remote ETH link.

Disable

MSTP Card menu : GFP150 eXtra > MSTP >Bridge SettingsBy default, the MSTP protocol is activated, under condition of activation ofthe licenceSee § 7.2.5 - Using the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150eXtra card

MSTP




Configuration Wording Access paths and parameters Default valuexGE-DM Set-up

GigaEthernet AccessPoints

Card menu : xGE-DM > ETH

"ifAdminStatus"Traffic authorization on the Ethernet interface Activated"Logical Interface"- UNI : client side interface"Physical Interface"Choice of the "Automatic" (with autonegotiation of the Pause mode) or"Manual" physical interface : Pause/No PauseIn order to have a correct link, it is recommended to configure both localand remote equipment Ethernet interfaces with the same configuration

No pause

VCG Configuration of VCG(s)The principle is identical to that of the GFP150 eXtra card (§ 7.2.2.1)without SWITCH function (Each "ETH #n" port is necessarily associatedto the "VCG #n" port).




2.2.3.3 - Maintenance commands and operations

Wording Parameters Default valueOptical interface card STM-1 – STM-4 – STM-16 in Maintenance menuLoop-back "No loop-back" :

"Line" : transparent line loop-back,activated/not activated"Equipment" : transparent equipmentloop-back, activated/not activated

ActivatedNot activated

Not activated

Laser (Automatic Laser Shutdown) "ALS Enable" The automatic shutdown function forthe laser can be not activated (globalfunction to equipment)

Activated

Restart "2 sec" on operator action"90 sec" on operator action

Not activatedNot activated

LTU, 3E3DS3FA, 63E1FA, electrical interface STM-1 cards in MaintenancemenuLoop-back "No loop-back" :

"Line" : Transparent line loop-back,activated/not activated"Equipment" : Transparent equipmentloop-back, activated/not activated

ActivatedNot activated

Not activated

SWITCH HO/LO card in Maintenance menuTraffic on SWITCH HO/LO 1 (or 2) "Manual Switch to SWITCH 2 (or 1)"

activatedSwitchover of traffic on the otherSWITCH HO/LO card

PSU card in Maintenance menuPower On/Off "On"

"Off"ActivatedNot activated

Table 2-26 : Maintenance commands and operations.

2.2.3.4 - Alarm processing

Indicator LEDs and pushbuttons

The tables below give the meanings for the various indicator LEDs when activated and thepurpose of the pushbuttons.

Specific indicator LEDs to CTRL-2G card

Componentmonitored

Name Remark State Meaning

Equipment "ALA M" Red On Major or critical alarm"ALA m" Yellow On Minor alarm

Ethernet Without Green On Transmission in progress(management

access)Off No traffic

Without Yellow On Link correctOff No link

Table 2-27 : Specific indicator LEDs to CTRL-2G card



"TRAFFIC" indicator LEDs on PDH, STM, GIG-E, xGE-DM, GFP150 eXtra andSWITCH HO/LO cards

Yellow indicatorLED

Meaning

On Card carrying useful traffic : removal will result in traffic disturbance

Off Card not carrying traffic

Table 2-28 : « TRAFFIC » indicator LEDs on PDH, STM, GIG-E, xGE-DM, GFP150 eXtra and SWITCH HO/LO cards

"STATUS" indicator LEDs on all cards except PSU and FAN-2G

Green indicatorLED

Red indicatorLED

Meaning

On Off Card in serviceOn On Card in service and with alarm conditionOff Off Card hardware fault (fuse)Off On Card out of service

Flashing Selftest fault

Table 2-29 : « STATUS » indicator LEDs on all cards except PSU and FAN-2G

"STATUS" indicator LEDs on PSU card

Green indicatorLED

Red indicatorLED

Meaning

On Off The card supplies the subrack (forbidden extractionwithout maintenance operation)

On On Card in service and with alarm conditionOff Off Card hardware fault

The card does not produce currentOff On Out of service or failure card

The card does not produce current

Table 2-30 : « STATUS » indicator LEDs on PSU cards

Specific indicator LEDs to GFP150 eXtra

Componentmonitored

Name Remark State Meaning

Ethernet Without Yellow On Transmission in progress(traffic access) Off No traffic

Without Green On Link correctOff No link

Table 2-31 : Specific indicator LEDs to GFP150 eXtra card



Pushbuttons

Name Location Purpose Result when pressed"ACK" CTRL-2G

front panelAlarm

acknowledge.When pressed, disables outgoing alarmloops A, B. Visual alarm is maintained.

"INITCONFIG"*

CTRL-2G Configurationreload

"Manufacturer" configuration is reloaded

Table 2-32 : Pushbuttons

* To use the "INIT" pushbutton, press the pushbutton for at least 5 seconds. This pushbuttonis inaccessible (and not used) in normal operation.The card located in EXT 2 slot must be extracted for access.



Faults and alarms

The tables below give the severity level default values associated to the failures.

An alarm of gravity "major" or "critical" activates the major outgoing loops of the "POWER/ALM"connector of the CCU-2G cardAn alarm of gravity "minor" activates the minor outgoing loops of the "POWER/ALM" connectorof the CCU-2G cardAn alarm of gravity "warning" does not activate any outgoing loop (available on HTTP).

Alarms Name Severity level

Optical SPI : SDH Physical InterfaceSPI-LOS Loss Of Signal majorSPI-TF Transmit Fail majorSPI-LASER TEMP OUT OF RANGE

(Temperature out of range (only for L16.2+ andU16.2 cards)

major

RST : Regenerator Section TerminationRST-LOF Loss of frame for more than 1 to 3 ms majorRST-EBER-B1 Bit Error Rate > 10-5 on B1 Byte majorRST-TIM Regenerator Section – Trace Identifier Mismatch minorMST : Multiplex Section TerminationMST-AIS Alarm Indication Signal warningMST-EBER-B2 Bit Error Rate > 10-3 on B2 Byte majorMST-SD-B2 Degraded signal computed using bytes B2 minorMST-REI Remote Error Indication warningMST-RDI Remote Defect Indication warningMSP : Multiplex Section ProtectionPAM Protection Architecture Mismatch

(mismatch bit 5 in received K2 byte)minor (1)

SCM Selector Control Mismatch(protocol mismatch)

minor (1)

OTM Operation Type Mismatch[DNR (Do Not Reverse) request is received in K1

and protection is revertive or SF/SD request isreceived in K1 with incorrect Sf/Sd Priority

minor (1)

MS-SPRing : Multiplex Section – Shared Protection RingARV APS protocol Rules Violation failure majorATO APS protocol Time Out failure majorAUN APS protocol Unknown Node failure majorPTM Potential Traffic Misconnection failure minorMMS Multiple Multiplex Section failure minor

Table 2-33 : Alarms and severity levels

(1) When the MSP is configured in 1+1




MSA : Multiplex Section AdaptationAU-AIS Administrative Unit - Alarm Indication Signal warningAU-LOP Administrative Unit - Loss Of Pointer majorHPOM : High order Path Overhead MonitoringHO-EBER-B3 Bit Error Rate > 10-5 on B3 Byte majorHO-SD-B3 High Order Path - Signal Degrade minorHO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 byte) warningHO-RDI High Order Path - Remote Defect Indication

(G1 byte)warning

HO-UNEQ Remote Error Indication (G1 byte) warningHO-TIM HO-RDI minorHPT : High order Path TerminationHO-SD-B3 High Order Path - Signal Degrade minorHO-EBER-B3 Bit Error Rate > 10-5 on B3 Byte majorHO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 byte) warningHO-RDI High Order Path - Remote Defect Indication

(G1 byte)warning

HO-UNEQ High Order Path - UNEQuipped payload) warningHO-TIM High Order Path - Trace Identifier Mismatch minorHO-PLM Payload Label Mismatch warningHO-LOM High Order Path - Loss Of Multitrame minorHPA : Higher order Path AdaptationTU-AIS Tributary Unit - Alarm Indication Signal warningTU-LOP Tributary Unit - Loss Of Pointer minorLPOM : Lower order Path Overhead MonitorLO-EBER-B3 (VC3) Bit Error Rate > 10-3 on B3 Byte majorLO-EBER-V5 (VC12) Bit Error Rate > 10-3 on V5 Byte majorLO-SD-B3 (VC3) Signal Degrade - B3 minor

LO-SD-V5 (VC12) Signal Degrade - V5 minor

LO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 or V5 byte) warningLO-RDI Low order Path - Remote Defect Indication

(G1 or V5 byte)warning

LO-UNEQ Low order Path - UNEQuipped payload warningLO-TIM Low Order Path - Trace Identifier Mismatch minor





LPT : Lower order Path TerminationLO-EBER-B3 (VC3) Bit Error Rate > 10-3 on B3 Byte majorLO-EBER-V5 (VC12) Bit Error Rate > 10-3 on V5 Byte majorLO-SD-B3 (VC3) Signal Degrade - B3 minor

LO-SD-V5 (VC12) Signal Degrade - V5 minor

LO-REI Remote Error Indication (G1 or V5 byte) warningLO-RDI Low order Path - Remote Defect Indication

(G1 or V5 byte)warning

LO-UNEQ Low order Path – UNEQuipped warningLO-TIM Low Order Path - Trace Identifier Mismatch minorLO-PLM Low order Path – Payload Label Mismatch warningPPI : PDH Physical InterfacePPI-LOS (21 x 2M) Loss Of Signal minor-Inv.PPI-LOS (34 / 45M) Loss Of Signal minor-Inv.PPI-AIS Alarm Indication Signal warningPPI-RLOL (34 / 45 M) Receive Loss Of Lock warningVCG : Virtual ContainerLOM Loss of Multiframe warningSQM SeQuence Mismatch warningLOA Loss of Aligment majorVCG rdi (2)(only GFP150)

VCG - Remote Defect Indication warning

VCG defect (3) All VCG is failed, interrupted traffic majorVCG degraded (3) (4) Some VCG are failed, degraded traffic minorLCAS : Link Capacity Adjustment SchemeLCAS Member fail (4) A member of VCG is failed warningGFP : General Framing ProcedureLFD Loss of GFP Frame Delineation majorLOCS Los Of Client Signal minorLOCCS Los Of Client Character Synchronisation minorUPM User Payload Mismatch minorEXM EXtension header Mismatch minor


(2) This alarm raises only in LCAS mode when SF (TU-AIS, TU-LOP, SD) is detected on allthe VCG members of the remote equipment.

(3) These alarms are indications of state of the path elaborated for the network manager insupplement of faults indications ; of this fact 2 indications can be transmitted in logs foronly one default.

(4) This alarm raises only if LCAS mode is active.




Access : Data Physical InterfaceETH Interface Defect Loss of Ethernet link majorLOS Loss of Optical Signal majorLINK DOWN Loss of Data majorPause Mode Rejected(5)

Pause Mode Rejected major

SETS : Synchronous Equipment Timing SourceLOS T3 Loss of signal on synchronization input T3 minorLOS T2 Loss of signal on synchronization input T2 warningLOS T1 Loss of signal on synchronization input T1 warningLOS T4 Fault on synchronization output T4 minorSYNC FREQ OUT OFRANGE

Synchronization rhythm frequency out of phaselocked loop range (6)

minor

TCM : Tandem Connection MonitoringLTC Loss of Tandem Connection majorTC-INCAIS TC - INComing AIS minorTC-APIM TC - Access Point Identifier Mismatch majorTC-RDI TC - Remote Defect Indication minorTC-ODI TC - Outgoing Defect Indication minorTC-REI TC - Remote Error Indication minorTC-OEI TC - Outgoing Error Indication minorTC-UNEQ TC – UNEQuipped payload majorLocal equipmentLocal user inputs # 1 Local input loop 1 warningLocal user inputs # 2 Local input loop 2 warningLocal user inputs # 3 Local input loop 3 majorLocal user inputs # 4 Local input loop 4 minorLocal user output # 1 Local output loop 1 warning (7)Local user output # 2 Local output loop 2 warning (8)


(5) For GIG-E card, this alarm is raised when QoS Mode Pause is selected and if the cardcannot send pause frames.For GFP150 and xGE-DM cards, this alarm is raised when the "Automatic" mode and the"Pause" capability are selected and the Pause status = No Pause (the remote equipmenthas refused the negotiation of Pause).

(6) Internal equipment rhythm is then kept in a ±9.2 ppm range

(7) By default, the Local user output #1 loop is activated when a major alarm is present

(8) By default, the Local user output #2 loop is activated when a minor alarm is present




Remote equipmentRemote Mngt major Remote major alarm major (9)Remote Mngt minor Remote minor alarm minor (9)FAN-2G moduleOne Fan Failed One Fan Failed majorFans Failed At least two Fans Failed majorPower Supply Fail 1(10)

Defective Power supply block 1 major

Power Supply Fail 2(10)

Defective Power supply block 2 major

Power supply48V#1 Missing of 48V#1 input major48V#2 Missing of 48V#2 input major48VS Missing of 48V signaling input minorEquipment managementPPP#1 to 34 DOWN Loss of management link PPP#i minor

Ethernet DOWN Loss of Ethernet link minor

OthersCard Alarms Missing Card

Mismatch CardTraffic not provided (only PDH cards)

Defective Card(see Table 2-38)

No MSTP Licence(only GFP150 eXtra card)

SFP missingSFP mismatchSFP defective

SFP not approve

majormajormajor

major

majormajormajormajormajor


(9) If the configured equipment is declared central office

(10) The two alarm indications are operational only if the module FAN-2G arranges the optionof redundant converter.



Information Localization Description

"FPGA Codes Missing orNot Compatible"

CTRL-2G Card At least one flash FPGA code is absent or isincompatible

"Soft. Codes Missing orNot Compatible"

CTRL-2G Card At least one flash soft code is absent or isincompatible

"RAM Test Failed" CCU-2G Card RAM self test has failed"RAM Too Small" CCU-2G Card The RAM size is too small"Hardware Incompatible" All Cards The hardware release of the card is

incompatible with the CTRL soft"Unknown Family inInventory"

All Cards The card family is not managed by the CTRLsoft

"Inventory Not Readable" All Cards The card inventory is not readable"Incorrect Inventory" All Cards The card inventory is incorrect"FPGA CodeIncompatible"

All Cards A FPGA code is incompatible with the CTRLsoft

"FPGA Code Missing" All Cards A FPGA code is missing in flash memory"Cannot Load FPGA" All Cards A FPGA code cannot be loaded"FPGA Test Failed" All Cards The FPGA self test has failed"MICRO FPGA TestFailed"

SWITCH HO/LOCards

The MICRO FPGA self test has failed

"BDT FPGA Test Failed" SWITCH HO/LOCards

The BDT FPGA self test has failed

"WEST FPP ASIC" TestFailed"

SWITCH HO/LOCards

The "WEST FPP ASIC(s)" self test has failed

"EAST FPP ASIC" TestFailed"

SWITCH HO/LOCards

The "EAST FPP ASIC(s)" self test has failed

"Soft. Code Incompatible" GIG-E Card The software code revision is incompatiblewith the CTRL software

"Soft. Code Missing" GIG-E Card The software code is missing in flash memory"Cannot Load Software" GIG-E Card The software code cannot be loaded"Software NotResponding"

GIG-E Card The software card does not respond

"Supply Failure" All Cards Power supply failure"PSU Family Mismatch" PSU cards The PSU card is incompatible with the other

PSU cards of the shelf"Incorrect Inventory orPower Supply Failed"

LTU21E1 orLTU3E3DS3 Cards

Power supply failure or incorrect inventory

"PDH ASIC 1 TestFailed"

63E1 or 3E3DS3Cards

The ASIC 1 self test has failed


63E1 or 3E3DS3Cards



63E1 or 3E3DS3Cards


"LTU CPLD Test Failed" LTU21E1 orLTU3E3DS3 Cards

The CPLD self test has failed

"LTU LIU Test Failed" LTU3E3DS3 Cards The LIU self test has failed

Table 2-38 : Associated informations to card defective alarm



Fault correlation

A correlation processing is performed on all the detected faults.

This correlation mechanism, implemented on each change of information collected, is used toremove faults induced by other faults to facilitate fault isolation.

The tables below define the faults which are masked by each fault detected in the system.

Key :X : The fault considered on the current line is masked by the faults of the current

column.ex : Fault 3 (LOF) is masked by fault 2 (LOS).

Correlation of STM-n faults

FAULTSFAULTS

1TF

2LOS

3LOF

4TIM

5EBER

-B1

6AIS

7EBER-

B2

8SD-B2

9RDI

10REI

1 SPI-TF

2 SPI-LOS

3 RST-LOF X

4 RST-TIM X X

5 RST-EBER-B1 X X X

6 MST-AIS X X X X

7 MST-EBER-B2 X X X X X

8 MST-SD-B2 X X X X X X

9 MST-RDI X X X

10 MST-REI X X X X

Table 2-39 : Correlation of STM-n faults

Correlation of MSP faults

FAULTSFAULTS

1PAM

2SCM

3OTM

1 PAM

2 SCM X

3 OTM X

Table 2-40 : Correlation of MSP faults

Correlation of MS-SPRing faults

FAULTSFAULTS

1AUN

2ARV

3ATO

4PTM

5MMS

1 AUN

2 ARV X

3 ATO X X

4 PTM X X X

5 MMS X X X X

Table 2-41 : Correlation of MS-SPRing faults



Correlation of HPOM/HPT faults from SDH and xGE-DM cards

The HO faults are masked by the STM-n faults : LOS, LOF and MST-AIS..

The HO-LOM fault is filtered if there is no configured VC12 connection on this STM-n

FAULTSFAULTS

1AU-AIS

2AU-LOP

3UNEQ

4TIM

5RDI

6REI

7PLM

8TU-LOM

9EBER

-B3

10SD-B3

1 AU-AIS

2 AU-LOP

3 HO-UNEQ X X

4 HO-TIM X X X

5 HO-RDI X X X X

6 HO-REI X X X X X

7 HO-PLM (HPT) X X X X

8 HO-LOM (HPT) X X X X X

9 HO-EBER-B3 X X X

10 HO-SD-B3 X X X X

Table 2-42 : Correlation of HPOM/HPT faults from SDH and xGE-DM cards

Correlation of HPT faults from GIG-E cards

The HPT faults are masked by the STM faults : LOS, LOF and MST-AIS.

The only alarm associated to the SDH channel is LOA and is correlative by the LOM, SQM,PLM, UNEQ, TIM and VC-AIS of all VC4 that compose the channel.

FAULTS

FAULTS

1AU-AIS =VC4-AIS

2AU-LOP =VC4-AIS

3SD-B3

4UNEQ

5TIM

6PLM

7RDI

8Concat_

LOM

9Concat_

SQM

1 AU-AIS = VC4-AIS

2 AU-LOP = VC4-AIS

3 HO-SD-B3 X X X

4 HO-UNEQ X X

5 HO-TIM X X X

6 HO-PLM X X X X

7 HO-RDI X X X X

8 Concat_LOM X X X X X

9 Concat_SQM X X X X X X

Table 2-43 : Correlation of HPT faults from GIG-E cards



Correlation of HPA/LPOM/LPT faults

The HPA/LPOM/LPT faults are masked by the STM faults (LOS, LOF and MST-AIS), the MSAfaults (AU-AIS and AU-LOP) and the HPT faults (UNEQ, TIM, PLM and LOM)

The HPA faults (TU-AIS and TU-LOP) are correlative by the HO-LOM fault only for theconnections of VC12 type.

FAULTSFAULTS

1TU-AIS

2TU-LOP

3UNEQ

4TIM

5RDI

6REI

7PLM

8EBER

9SD

1 TU-AIS

2 TU-LOP

3 LO-UNEQ X X

4 LO-TIM X X X

5 LO-RDI X X X X

6 LO-REI X X X X X

7 LO-PLM (LPT) X X X X

8 LO-EBER X X X

9 LO-SD X X X X

Table 2-44 : Correlation of HPA/LPOM/LPT faults

Correlation of 2, 34, 45 Mbit/s ports faults

FAULTSFAULTS

1LOS

3RLOL

2AIS

1 PPI-LOS

1 PPI-RLOL (*) X

2 PPI-AIS X X

Table 2-45 : Correlation of 2, 34, 45 Mbit/s ports faults

(*) only for 34/45 Mbits ports

Correlation of remote faults

LO-REI, LO-RDI, HO-REI and HO-RDI faults of unidirectional connection input are filtered.



Correlation of VCG faults from GFP150 eXtra, GIG-E and xGE-DM cards

The LOA, LFD, LOCS, LOCCS, UPM, EXM, RDI, DEFECT and DEGRADED alarms are VCGalarms.

The LOM, SQM, LCAS_MemberFail alarms are alarms of member constituting a VCG.

FAULTS

FAULTS

1LOA

2LFD

3LOCS

4LOCCS

5EXM

6UPM

7LOM#i

8SQM#i

9LCAS_

MemberFail#i

10RDI

11DEFECT

12DEGRADED

1 LOA

2 LFD X

3 LOCS X X

4 LOCCS X X

5 EXM X X

6 UPM X X X

7 LOM#i

8 SQM#i X

9 LCAS_MemberFail#i

10 RDI

11 DEFECT X X

12 DEGRADED

Table 2-46 : Correlation of VCG faults from GFP150 eXtra, GIG-E and xGE-DM cards

Definitions of VCG_DEFECT and VCG DEGRADED synthesized failure indications

Notations used in the following paragraphes :

SF Member#i corresponds to at least one of among failures LOM#i, SQM#i, SF_LPT#i or LCASMember Fail#i of VC member #i of a VCG.

SF_LPT#i corresponds to at least one of among failures TU-LOM (for VC-12 only), TU-AIS, TU-LOP, LO-SD (if LCAS activated), LO-PLM, LO-UNEQ, LO-TIM of the LPT functional block of VC#i.

Please note that LCAS Member Fail#i is computed only if LCAS is active.

Definitions:

When LCAS mode is not active,

- VCG_DEFECT is set whenever one of the LOCS, LOCCS, UPM, EXM, LFD, LOA failureindications is raised or at least one of the SF Member#i is raised.

- VCG_DEGRADED is never set

When LCAS mode is active,

- VCG_DEFECT is set if one of the LOCS, LOCCS, UPM, EXM, LFD, LOA, RDI failureindications is raised or all SF Member#1 to SF Member#X are simultaneously raised.

- VCG_DEGRADED is set if VCG_DEFECT is not set and at least one of the SF Member#i israised.

VCG_DEGRADED alerts the operator that, although Ethernet over SDH traffic is still going on, -thanks to LCAS scheme – the requested SLA may not be achieved due to lack of SDHbandwidth.



2.2.4 - Performance processing

Performance processing consists of supervising the following monitoring points :

For the local equipment :

• the regeneration section (byte B1) ("near end working (protection) RS"),

• the multiplexing section (byte B2) ("near end working (protection) MS"),

• the VC4 tributary paths ("near end High Path Virtual Container"),

• VC3 tributary paths ("near end Low Path Virtual Container"),

• VC12 tributary paths (byte V5) ("near end Low Path Virtual Container"),

• TCM tributary paths (N1 byte) (IEC : incoming error counter)

For the remote equipment :

• the multiplexing section (byte M1) ("far end working (protection) MS"),

• the VC4 tributary paths ("far end High Path Virtual Container").

• VC3 tributary paths ("far end Low Path Virtual Container")

• VC12 tributary paths (byte V5) ("far end Low Path Virtual Container").

Performance processing involves the following functions :

• computation of number of erroneous blocks on the local and remote malfunctions andmonitoring for appearance of faults over a period of one second,

• computation and determination of states : ES (Errored Second), SES (Severely ErroredSecond ), BBE (Background Block Error) and UAS (UnAvailable Second) for eachmonitoring point,

• preparation, for each monitoring point, of 15 minute and 24 hour counters (BBE, ES, SESand UAS).

Determination of performance states : ES, SES and UAS :

For each monitoring point, the performance states are as following :

• ES (Errored Seconds) : number of seconds with at least one error detected over aperiod of 1 s or a fault,

• SES (Severely Errored Seconds) : number of severely errored seconds,



Monitoring point SES declaration thresholdRS (byte B1) (for local) ≥ 2400 (1 block by frame)MS (byte B2) (for local) and MS (byte M1) (for remote) ≥ 28 800 (24 blocss by frame)HP – VC4 / IEC ≥ 2400 (1 block by frame)LP - VC3 ≥ 2400 (1 block by frame)LP - VC12 (byte V5) ≥ 600 (1 block by 4 frames)

• UAS (UnAvailable Second) : number of unavailable seconds,

• BBE (Background Block Error) : number of erroneous blocks not including SES.

REMINDER : An SES is a second for which the number of errors exceed the definedthreshold or during which at least one fault is detected.

Generation of 15 minute and 24 hour counters :

The result of the computations is then combined for each monitoring point in :

• 24 hour counters (BBE, ES, SES and UAS),

• 15 minute counters (BBE, ES, SES and UAS).

The last six "unavailable periods" are preserved and displayed on the web browser.

Performance processing is initialized on creation of the connection.

The following information can be displayed on the web browser : the last 16 non-null 15 minutecounters, the current 15 minute counter, the last non-null 24 hour counter, the current 24 hourcounter and the last 6 unavailable periods.

2.2.5 - Optical Supervision

Optical modules SFP DDM (Digital Diagnostic Monitoring) allow the supervision of the parametersbelow (Menu : STM-n > TR REC > SFP or 2GE-DM > SFP) :

• OOP : Optical Output Power (dBm)

• OIP : Optical input Power (dBm)

• LBC : Laser Bias Current (mA)

• Temp : SFP module Temperature (°C)

• Voltage : SFP module supply Voltage (V)



2.2.6 - Synchronization

Synchronization of the local and remote equipment is managed in accordance with the availablesynchronization sources, their quality and the priority assigned to each.

The possible synchronization sources include :

• standalone operation (holdover* or local oscillator mode),

• 2 sources T1 extracted from incoming tributary STM-1, STM-4 or STM-16 trains (1 to 32possibilities depending on number and type of cards present in equipment),

• 2 sources T1 extracted from incoming line STM-16 trains (1 to 2 possibilities depending onnumber of "LINE" cards in equipment),

• 2 sources T2 extracted from incoming tributary 2 Mbit/s trains (maximum 1 T2 by 63E1 or63E1FA card).The 63E1FA card does not propose T2 synchronization when it is located in "TRIB 1" slot.The TRIB 8 and LTU 8-x slots are only proposed in T2_1.

• T3_1 and T3_2 : two external sources, 2 MHz G.703

* The Holdover mode is a memorization of a last valid synchronization timing.Until 60s can be necessary after a source selection to validate the holdover mode.

NOTE : On creation of an MSP protection, the « Protection » link inherits the configurations ofthe « Working » link and therefore, in particular,those of synchronization.

The Synchronization screen summarizes the status of the timing obtained from thetraffic link under the « Working » interface reference.

The figures below give examples of synchronization in accordance with the equipmentconnections.



SSM = PRC

ADR2500 eXtra 1

SSM = PRC

T1 Line2=T0=T3 (ADR2500

eXtra 1)

T1 Line2 = T0 = T3

ADR2500 eXtra 2

T0 = T1 Line 1

ADR2500 eXtra 3

T0 = T1 Line1

STM16 access (T1-c) =:- Quality = DNU

- Priority = 2.

Internalsynchronization

T0 = T3

2 MHz clock output

T4 = T0 = T3 (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

2 MHz clock outputT4 = T0 = T1 Line1 = T3 (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

Synchronization of other equipment

External synchronizationinput at 2 MHz (T3) :

- Quality = PRC, - Priority = 1. - Quality = DNU

- Priority = 2.

)1) )

)2) )

)1) )

((2(

STM16 access(T1-c) =:

((2(

((1(

Synchronization ofother equipment

Figure 2-6 : Synchronization using 2 MHz external synchronization input (T3)

SSM = PRC

ADR2500 eXtra 1

SSM = PRC

T1 Line2=T0=T1"Trib"(ADR2500 eXtra 1)

T1 Line2=T0=T1"Trib"

ADR2500 eXtra 2

T0 = T1 Line 1

ADR2500 eXtra 3

T0 = T1 Line1

STM16 access (T1-c) =:- Quality = DNU

- Priority = 2.

InternalsynchronizationT0 = T1"Trib"

2 MHz clock output

T4 = T0 = T1"Trib" (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

2 MHz clock outputT4 = T0 = T1 Line1 = T1"Trib" (ADR2500 eXtra 1)

Synchronization of other equipment

T1"Trib" STM-n accessSSM = PRC,

- Priority = 1. - Quality = DNU- Priority = 2.

)1) )

)2) )

)1) )

((2(

STM16 access (T1-c) =:

((2(

((1(

Figure 2-7 : Synchronization using a synchronous tributary access



2.2.7 - Loops Management

On remote sites (i.e. non-central site), two local outgoing loops (Major and minor local useroutputs) are activated on the appearance of local alarms : equipment alarms and configured remoteindication loops (Local user input #1, #2, #3 and #4).

The remote loopback function allows an equipment named "Central Site", to register faultspresent on remote sites.

This function requires each site to transmit to the "Central Site" an alarm presence message.Depending on the configuration, this message corresponds to the local alarms and/or the remotemonitoring loopback 1 and 2 (Local user input #1 or #2). Data are transmitted within the S1 byte (the 4bits not used for the synchronisation).

For each site in the network, data chaining in either a bus or ring type network architecture isprovided by a "OR" function between data received via the incoming S1 STM-n, and local data (Localalarms and/or Local user input #1and #2).

In the "Central Site" equipment, an "OR" function between data received via incoming S1STM-n and local data enables local alarm loopbacks to be activated (Local user outputs Major andMinor). Furthermore, a major/critical or minor remote default detected via S1 will trigger in the “CentralSite” equipment a local alarm with the major or minor severity.

S1 emission and reception may be configured separately for each STM-n access. This allowsthe rejection of S1 received from a remote equipment which does not use the S1 byte for remoteloopback. This is also used to deselect S1 emission in some or all STM-n access points from centralsites in order to prevent a permanent alarm activation.

To configure the remote loopback function, the following parameters should be programmed :"Central Site", “Send Remote 1” and “Send Remote 2” for local data, and “Enable Input” (Reception ofS1) and “Enable Output” (Emission of S1) for each configured STM-n access.

The “Enable Input” and “Enable Output” parameters take default values on each modificationof the “Central Site” option. Therefore, if the equipment becomes “Central Site”, the “Enable Input”boxes become selected and the “Enable Output” boxes unselected. And if the equipment becomes“Remote Site” (default configuration), all “Enable Input” and “Enable Output” boxes becomeunselected. Then, these default values may be modified when required.

NOTE 1 : When Local User Input #1 and #2 collect major/critical and minor alarm informations, it isnecessary to give them a "warning" severity in order to avoid a permanent activation.

NOTE 2 : If the equipment loopback function is configured, it is necessary to deselect the S1 receptionon the corresponding STM-n access in order to avoid a permanent alarm activation.

NOTE 3 : If a MSP type protection is configured, the loops management parameters are notconfigurable on the Protection access. They take the same values as the Working access parametersand the S1 byte is broadcasted on both access points of the MSP pair.

The Figure 2-8 gives an example of remote management of the local outgoing loopsaccording to the equipment connections.



ADR2500 eXtra 1Central Site

S1 Reception enabledfor all accesses

S1Emission notenabled for any access

ADR2500 eXtra 3Remote Site

S1 emission andreception enabled for

all accesses

ADR2500 eXtra 2Remote Site

S1 emission andreception enabled for

all accesses

Invalid S1*

Local Outgoing Loops =Local Alarms + Remote alarms

Invalid S1*

Valid S1* Valid S1*

Local Outgoing Loops =Local Alarms

Local Outgoing Loops =Local Alarms

* Valid S1 : OR with thelocal alarms and the receivedS1 alarms (excepted twin onewith valid one)

* Invalid S1 : S1 whosemost significant bit is setto 1

Valid S1*

Valid S1*

Figure 2-8 : Remote loopback function (collection of alarms on a Central Site)



2.2.8 - MS-SPRing protection on LINE interfaces

2.2.8.1 - Introduction

To protect a ring-type digital data transmission network, several protection mechanisms areavailable, including MS-SPRing, SNC and MSP. The MSP and MS-SPRing protection systems areexclusive with respect to each other on a single multiplexing section, and the SNC protection doesnot apply to channels protected by MS-SPRing.

The MS-SPRing protection function (Multiplex Section Shared Protection Ring) is available on ringtopologies with up to 16 nodes. Compared to the SNC protection, it provides the advantage ofshared use of protection resources for several trails within the ring.

In these multiplex section shared protection rings, the active channels carry the normal trafficsignals whereas the protection channels are reserved for protection of the traffic. This is availableon the « Line » interfaces of the ADR2500 eXtra.

2.2.8.2 - Principle

The ADR2500 eXtra implements the MS-SPRing protection diagram (BSHR) for ring protectionon 2 fibers.

The fibers are divided into channels; for example, one STM-16 contains 16 AU4 channels. The setof channels is divided into Working channels and protection channels. There are an equal numberof each. A so called "channel" is a channel within the ring and not within an equipment.Mechanisms are implemented by an equipment to route the Working channel information onProtection channels in the opposite direction when a fiber break occurs, for example.

Half of the channels on each fiber are used for protection. Thus, there is only a single physicalring.

The standard calls for the possibility of transmitting the unprotected traffic on certain channelswhile other channels are protected : thus we have NUT channels (Non-preemptible UnprotectedTraffic) which cannot be interrupted for protection purposes and Extra-Traffic which is carried inprotection channels, available when the ring is idle, and therefore interrupted during a protectionaction (Extra Traffic non supported).

Figure 2-9 : Example of a protected ring

NormalBackup

Dir.

6 5

1 2 3

4



In the example given above, there is a connection between nodes 6 and 3 via nodes 1 and 2. Afiber break between nodes 2 and 3 requires re-routing of the channels in node 2. The channelsthus protected cross the ring in the reverse direction to reach node 3 using the protectionchannels..

The protection diagram contains 8 Working channels and 8 Protection channels :

Chan. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16Type W W W W W W W W P(1) P(2) P(3) P(4) P(5) P(6) P(7) P(8)

When there is no problem on the ring, the traffic passes in 8 AU4 (8 Working).

The association of numbers to the Working and protection channels is defined by the standardand cannot be reordered. Channel 11 always protects channel 3.

2.2.8.3 - Configuration rules relative to 2-fibers MS-SPRing protection

This section contains the configuration rules to be applied (mandatory). These rules areautomatically applied transparently by IONOS-NMS.

CAUTIONS :

- Implementation and maintenance of the MS-SPRing protection configuration using the operationinterface without the IONOS-NMS network manager is extremely tricky and is not recommendedby SAGEM.

- Node-by-node activation of the protection should only be performed provided no section fault (SFor SD) is present.

For any automatic configuration of the MS-SPRing protection, refer to the IONOS-NMS installationand user guide.

Configuration of topological map

The topological map appears in the form of an ordered set of values called identifiers which mustbe different for each NE, and therefore unique within a ring.

Starting from any first node, the topological map is filled in by listing the identifiers node by nodewhile turning in the conventional direction : "East to West" in an node crossed, and therefore"Line West (L1) to Line East (L2)" between two nodes.

Each node has a topological map of the ring updated by the local personnel or by themanagement system.



Figure 2-10 : Topological map of a ring

Nodes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16Identifiers A J M P B L K G S E F R C D N H

RULES :

Adding or deleting a node in a ring requires modification of the topological maps of all the nodes.

A MS-SPRing ring cannot contain more than 16 nodes.

Configuration of misconnection map in the case where the VC4 of the ring transportcontainers of lower order (VC3 and VC12) that are all extracted in a unique point of thering

In this case, the VC4 are the links point to point between the entrance and the exit of the ring andwe are brought back to a MS-SPRing protection therefore with suppression of signal at the levelVC4 normalized

The signal cancellation topological map (used in each node) contains the topological addresses ofthe nodes through which the AU4 traffic enters and exits the ring : this map is only used for signalcancellation purposes (injection of AU-AIS) subsequent to potential erroneous connectionsoccurring during multiple faults in the ring.

NormalBackup

Dir.

6 5

1 2 3

4

Q

R

T=W5

T=W3

Figure 2-11 : Example of incoming and outgoing traffic of a ring



For each outgoing traffic via the time slots of the East and West interfaces, the signal cancellationtable gives the node identifier where the traffic is inserted in the ring and the node identifier wherethe traffic exits the ring.

In the example above, the signal cancellation table in node 2 is :

Node 2 West :

Time slot W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8Entry 3 4Exit 1 6

Node 2 East :

Time slot W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8EntryExit

The Q connection enters the ring in node 4 and exits in node 6.

It crosses node 2 in the East/West direction on Working timeslot 5.

The R connection enters the ring in node 3 and exits in node 1.

It crosses node 2 in the East/West direction on Working timeslot 3.

No connection crosses node 2 in the West/East direction.

Configuration of misconnection map in the case where the VC4 of the ring transportcontainers of lower order (VC3 and VC12) that are inserted / dropped to different placesof the ring (case of the VC4 omnibuses)

In this case, two protection solutions with choice by the operator at the time of the configurationare proposed :

- the VC4 omnibuses are decomposed in n VC4 carriers joining every adjacent equipment; theseVC4 are protected in MS-Spring and the suppression of signal is assured at the VC4 level inaccordance with the norm. The inter-operability is guaranteed thus

- the VC4 omnibuses are declared as NUT trafic ; they are not therefore protected at the level MS-Spring and one uses the SNC protection for lower order paths that they transport

RULES :

- The signal cancellation table of each node must be updated when a trail is created or deleted inthe network.

- In each node, each Working timeslot of the signal cancellation table must contain both the entryand exit numbers of the node on which the traffic circulates on the ring.



Configuration des NUT

The NUT map (unprotected uninterrupted traffic) must be identical in each node.It indicates the NUT channels, i.e. channels for which the protection mechanism is inactivated.

Only Working channels are contained in the NUT map. If the Working channel is NUT, thecorresponding protection channel is also NUT.

Example :

Time slot W1 W2 W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8NUT X

In the above example, the channel 3 is set to NUT, so the Working channel N° 3 and itsProtection channel N° 11 are both NUT.



2.2.9 - TCM Function

The TCM function takes place at network level and provides the operator with a monitoring service forVC4 data paths by the mean of TC trail delimited by TCM Points.

2.2.9.1 - TCM Points at Equipment Level

TCM Points can be set up at VC4 bi-directional cross-connections level within each equipement.

TCM Points can be configured in 2 modes :

- intrusive mode : TC EndPoint,- non-intrusive mode : TC Monitoring Point.

The TC EndPoint consists of a Source entity and a Sink entity ; the TC EndPoints work on a pair basis(TC Endpoint X and TC EndPoint Y) ; the part of data path delimited by the pair X/Y is named a TCTrail.

The Source of Point X generates a multiframe which is carried by the N1 byte alongside the TC Trailup to the Sink of Point Y ; samely in the reverse direction, the Source of Point Y generates amultiframe carried by the N1 byte up to the Sink of Point X.

The Figure 2-12 shows the four entities Source X, Sink X, Source Y and Sink Y working togetheraccording to :

- their localisation within a same EndPoint ;- their assocation within a same direction.



Figure 2-12 : TC EndPoints X/Y

The operator has to take care of setting up the pair X/Y in a tête-bêche position (Soure X(Y) facingSink Y(X)) in order to the Source of one Point can communicate with the Sink of the other Point andthis for each direction. TC-UNEQ and Loss of TC alarms can be due to a wrong setting up of the pairX/Y ; please refer to Figure 2-13, Figure 2-14 and Figure 2-15.

TC EndPoints X/Y are Source facing Sink ; they can delimit a TC Trail

Figure 2-13 : TC EndPoints X/Y - Source facing Sink

VC4 XConnection

Physical Connection

Source

Sink Source

Sink

TC EndPoint X TC EndPoint Y

TC Trail

4 Entities : Source X, Sink X, Source Y, Sink Y2 EndPoints : X (Source X + Sink X) + Y (Source Y + Sink Y)2 Directions : D1 (Source X + Sink Y) + D2 (Source Y + Sink

Direction 1

Direction 2

Consequential Action RDI

Source

Sink Source

Sink


TC Trail



TC EndPoints X/Y are not Source facing Sink ; they cannot delimit a TC Trail

Figure 2-14 : TC EndPoints X/Y - Source not facing Sink

TC EndPoints X/Y are back to back ; they cannot delimit a TC Trail

Figure 2-15 : TC EndPoints X/Y – Source and Sink back to back

Sources and Sinks are then in position to cooperate and provide the following services :

- the Sink can detect a potential multiframe witin the received N1 bytes stream : TC-UNEQand Loss of TC alarms are raised if needed,

- the Sink extracts data from the received multiframe : IEC Counter, TC-REI, OEI, TC-RDI,ODI indications, TC-API field,

- the Source inserts the same data into the transmitted multiframe,- in case of of incoming AIS signal, VC-AIS information is forced by the Source into the IEC

counter ; this VC-AIS is detected by the Sink and reported as TC-incAIS alarm,- the Source transmits a API : TC-API Sent configurable by the operator,- the Sink detects the received API (TC-API Received) ; this API is compared to the TC-API

Expected (configurable by the operator),- an alarm TC-APIM is reported in case of mismatch between TC-API Expected and TC-API

Received ; this alarm can be inhibited by the operator.

The pair X/Y coherently configured can then take the consequential actions when defaults are detectedby a Sink, by propagating AIS signal in the downwards direction and by generating a RDI indication inthe upwards direction (Sink interacts with local Source) ; consequential actions are taken by a TCEndPoint only if it has been activated by the operator.

Source

Sink


Source

Sink

Source

Sink


Source

Sink



Nota1 : in order to minimize traffic errors, when a pair of TC Endpoints are set up, it is recommendedto follow the sequence :

- configure TC EndPoint X,- configure TC EndPoint Y (normally located on another equipment),- activate TC EndPoint X (or Y),- activate TC EndPoint Y (or X).

Nota2 : in order to minimize traffic errors, when a pair of TC Endpoints are removed, it isrecommended to follow the sequence :

- deactivate TC EndPoint X,- deactivate TC EndPoint Y (normally located on another equipment),- unconfigure TC EndPoint X (or Y),- unconfigure TC EndPoint Y (or X).

The TC Monitoring Point consists of two Monitor entities ; each one of them dealing with one trafficdirection ; each Monitor entity is able to intercept the N1 byte received in its direction, extract from themultiframe the same informations as a Sink entity ; however the N1 byte is not terminated and itcontinues to flow unchanged in the downwards stream.A TC Monitoring Point is standalone ; it cannot be activated ; it cannot take consequential actions.

The target of a TC Monitoring Point (Point Z) is to localise the source of a defect causing errors on TCtrail delimited by TC EndPoints X and Y ; the operator can walk Point Z alongside the TC trail betweenX and Y ; please refer to Figure 2-16.

When a cross-connection (bearing a TCM Point) is removed , the TCM Point is implicitly removed :desactivation (if EndPoint) and unconfiguration.

A TCM Point can be located on STM-1/4/16 boards ; GFP, GIGE and PDH boards cannot bear a TCMPoint.A TCM Point cannot be located on a Stm access involved into a MSP (Working side or Protected side).A TCM Point cannot be located on a Connection Point involved into a SNCP.

Figure 2-16 : TC Monitoring Point Z located between TC EndPoint X and TC EndPoint Y

Source

Sink Source

Sink


TC Trail

Mon1

Mon2

TC MonPoint Z



TC Alarms collected by a Sink/Monitor entity are as following :

Name Alarm Meaningltc Loss of Tandem Connection Sink or Monitor is unable to synchronize on multiframetc-incAIS Incoming AIS IEC field is forced to VC-AIS as indication that the

upward Source receives an AIS signal ; the problem islocated upward to the TC trail.

tc-APIM TC-API Mismatch The TC-API Received is different from the TC-APIExpected

tc-rdi TC-RDI TC-RDI indication is raised by the upward Sourcebecause its local Sink detects a fault (in the reversedirection).

tc-odi ODI ODI indication is raised by the upward Source becauseits local Sink has generated an AIS signal (in thereverse direction).

tc-rei TC-REI TC-REI indication is raised by the upward Sourcebecause its local Sink has propagated (in the reversedirection) blocks with errors caused by the TC trailcrossing.

tc-oei OEI OEI indication is raised by the upward Source becauseits local Sink has propagated (in the reverse direction)blocks with errors.

tc-uneq TC-UNEQ Received N1 byte has value 0 ; there is not a TCSource in the upwards direction.

Performance Counters collected by Sink/Monitor entity are only IEC Near counter showing BIP errorscaused by the TC trail crossing from the Source.

2.2.9.2 - TCM VC4 Points Management by http

A TCM VC4 Point is associated to VC4 cross-connection.

A VC4 cross-connection can be selected from the Traffic Connection window by means of its outputConnection Point :

- selection of the output Slot,- selection of the output Connection Point.

Configuration of the TC mode is made by checking check-boxes in the Select the interfacebelonging to the TC section of the Tandem Connection Function window as following :

Operator action ResultCheck-box A Check-box B TC Configuration StateNot checked Not checked TC is not configuredChecked Checked TC is configured in non-intrusive modeNot checked Checked TC is configured in intrusive mode at Interface BChecked Not checked TC is configured in intrusive mode at Interface A



In order to configure a TCM VC4 Point :

- select the VC4 cross-connection (the output being point A),- click on Configuration for access to Traffic Connection window,- check the Activate TC check-box ,- click on TC Configuration for access to Tandem Connection Function window,- select the mode and the interface of the TC as indicated before,- configure the different items of the TC (Monitoring check-box, Fault severities,

APIMDisable check-box, Expected TC-API, sent TC-API).

In order to unconfigure a TCM VC4 Point ;

- select the VC4 cross-connection,- click on Configuration for access to Traffic Connection window,- uncheck the Activate TC check-box .

In order to activate/deactivate a TCM VC4 Point ;

- select the VC4 cross-connection,- click on Configuration for access to Traffic Connection window,- click on TC Configuration for access to Tandem Connection Function window,- check/uncheck the Consequent Actions Enable TC check-box .

The Traffic Connection window can also be accessed (only if there is at least one configured TC) :

- click on a Switch board icon for access to Switch board options,- click on TC List option for acces to TC Configuration window,- select from the TC Interfaces section the TC to amend/display.

The Traffic Connection window shows following items :

- the Select the interface belonging to the TC section,- the Configuration section gathering following items :- Mon check-box (used if TC alarms/conters are monitored),- Consequent Actions Enable TC check-box,- Fault severity fields (one for each alarm type),- One (intrusive mode) or two (non-intrusive mode) Trace A/B sub-sections,- One (intrusive mode) or two (non-intrusive mode) Fault A/B sub-sections,

One Trace A/B sub-section gathers following items :

- APIMDisable check-box (tc-APIM fault if mismatch between TC-API Received and TC-APIExpected),

- (Trace) Received field : value of received TC-API,- (Trace) Exp. field : value configured for expected TC-API,- (Trace) Sent field : value configured for sent TC-API,

One sub-section Fault A/B gives the list of current active alarms of a Sink/Monitor entity.

The Counters – IEC Near window can be made as following :

- click on a Switch board icon for access to Switch board options,- click on TC Performance option.

This window shows usual performance items.



2.2.10 - Quality of service for VC4nv GigaEthernet

The GIG-E card allows the association of a gigabit Ethernet flow with a WAN SDH of variablebandwidth.

If the number of VC4 used on the WAN is strictly lower than 7, then the outgoing bandwidth onthe WAN is lower than the maximum flow on the gigabit Ethernet link and it is advisable to manage thecases of congestion which can occur.

Moreover, the functions for classification available with the GIG-E card allows to define up tofour classes of traffic.

The ADR2500 eXTra offers several types of parameter settings, adapted to variousapplications and various needs for differentiating user flows.

Some operating modes use the flow classification in order to handle the necessary droppings,but there exists a mode of rejection without discrimination, the “QoS None” mode, as well as a modewithout loss, the Pause mode used to inform the equipment upstream of the congestion.

Denomination Classification Traffic Loss CriteriaBandwidth control Yes, among 5

criteriaYes Respect of the requested contract of

trafficWRED Yes, among 4

criteriaYes Increasing priorities assigned to

classesQoS None No Yes, by RED Use rate of the transmission buffer on

the WAN sidePause Mode No No Use rate of the transmission buffer on

the WAN side

2.2.10.1 - Classification criteria

This paragraph enumerates various classifications available within the GIG-E card.The choice of the classification criterion is exclusive for the whole gigabit Ethernet port.Excepting the "QoS None" mode depicted below, if the incoming flows do not have the expected typeby the selected mode or if no configuration is explicitly associated with an incoming flow, the implicitclass is class 0.In these modes, the flows of Ethernet administration - frames with a destination address format as 0180 C2 XX XX XX - are systematically assigned to class 3.

"None" mode :

In this mode, all the frames coming from the gigabit Ethernet port are associated to the sameclass.

Thus, they have the same precedence and consequently the elimination is done withoutdistinction on the flow types.

Using this mode with small WAN flows and important specific traffics (ftp) can induce someinconvenience for applications with small traffic.



"802.1d" mode :

The “802.1d” mode is based on the “priority” field of the 802.1Q header. The configurationscreen allows to assign a service class to each "Priority" value.

802.1Q header format

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Destination Ethernet address

Source Ethernet addressTPID (Tag Protocol ID)

Priority CFI VLAN IDVLAN ID

Type/Length

"IPV4 TOS" mode :

The “IPV4 TOS” mode is based on the value of the “precedence” field from the "Type OfService" byte in the IP header. The configuration screen allows to assign a service class to each valueof the “precedence” field.

IPV4 header format

0 4 8 16 31Ver IHL TOS Total lengthIdentification Flags Fragment OffsetTTL Protocol Header checksumSource AddressDestination AddressOptions and padding

TOS field format :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Precedence D T R C 0

The “precedence” field on 3 bits allows to indicate 8 levels of priority : from 000 for the lowest to 111 forthe highest. Bits D,T,R and C are used to specify the transport mode for the data gram

D : 0 = Normal Delay, 1 = Low Delay.T : 0 = Normal Throughput, 1 = High Throughput.R : 0 = Normal Reliability, 1 = High Reliability.C : 0 = Normal cost, 1 = Minimal cost

"IPV6 TClass" mode :

The “IPV6 TClass” mode is based on the value of the TClass field (Traffic Class) from theIPV6 header. The configuration screen allows to assign a service class to each value of TClass"Priority" included between 8 and 15 - bit 0 forced to 1-



IPV6 header format (according to the RFC 2460) :

0 4 12 16 31Version Traffic Class Flow Label

Payload Length Next Header Hop LimitIP source addressIP destination address

Traffic Class (TClass) field format :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Priority

Only the 0 to 3 bits are used to define the 16 levels of priority from 0000 for the lowest, to 1111for the highest.

"VLanId" mode :

This mode is based on the “VLanId” field of the “802.1Q” header. The configuration screenallows to assign a service class to each value of the "VlanId" or to a list of “VlanId” values. The size forthe "Arranges Size" field is in power of 2.

It is possible to define 8 “VlanId” fields for each four class.

To assign a class of service to a “VLanId" or to a group of “VLanId” :- select the class of service,- fill out the “First Vlan Id” field- fill out either the “Last Vlan Id” field or the “Range Size” field- click on the “Add” button

To remove VLanId or a group of VLanId from a class of service :- select a class of service,- in the combo box at the bottom of the “Item” column, select VlanId to be removed- click on the “Delete” button

To display all the VLanId configuration- - select "All Classes".

802.1Q header format :

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7Destination Ethernet address

Source Ethernet addressTPID (Tag Protocol ID)

Priority CFI VLAN IDVLAN ID

Type/Length



"Balanced" mode :

The “Balanced” mode is based on the two less significant bits of the “VLanId” field in the802.1Q header. It implements a fixed assignment.

VlanId = xx00 -> class 0VlanId = xx01 -> class 1VlanId = xx10 -> class 2VlanId = xx11 -> class 3

It is also associated with a mode for bandwidth allocation preset to a minimum of 25% and to amaximum of 100% for each class.

2.2.10.2 - Bandwidth management

"Bandwidth" mode :

In the bandwidth mode, classification is used not to define relative priorities but contracts ofbandwidth for each class. The parameters are the minimum and maximum thresholds.

The minimum threshold indicates the percentage of bandwidth guaranteed for the class. Thesum of the minimum thresholds of the four classes cannot exceed 100%.

The maximum threshold indicates the maximum percentage of the bandwidth that will beallocated. If a class has an incoming flow equal to the outgoing flow and its maximum threshold is to 80%, it will be allocated only 80% even if the remaining 20% of the bandwidth are lost.

The "Bandwidth" mode carries out, beyond the flows guaranteed minima, a statistical on-assignment starting from the flow not allocated with the interval of previous time, which is distributedequitably between the classes being able there to claim. The rejections related to a going beyond ofthe contract of traffic are thus temporal, not statistic.

The configuration screen displays the bandwidth related to the number of VC constituting theWAN channel.

2.2.10.3 - Congestion management in emission on the WAN

This paragraph enumerates the various methods of congestion management in the GIG-Ecard. All the following explanations refer to a context of congestion.

"Red" mode :

This mode, dedicated to the configuration "QoS None", is used to handle frames in acompletely equitable way. As long as the buffer use rate does not reach the "First Point" value, theframes are accumulated in the buffer without dropping.

Between "First Point" and "Second Point", the recently received frames are droppedproportionally to the use rate.

When the use rate is above the "Second Point", all frames are dropped, thus making itpossible for the buffer to empty itself.

The rejection with RED makes it possible to use the depth of the outgoing buffer to temporarilyaccept an incoming flow with a higher rate than the WAN flow defined before starting to droppackages. In addition, the statistical and progressive loss leads the higher-layer protocols to controltheir outgoing traffic.



First Point Second Point0

100

% Loss

Buffer use rate

"WRed" mode :

In this mode, the frames are dropped according to their class of service : the most importantclass is the class 3, least important is the class 0 that is implicit class. The behavior of each class isdefined by the "Profile".

In the case of the "First Profile", below a use rate of 1%, no frame is dropped.Between 1% and 25%, class 0 frames are dropped proportionally to the buffer use rate, but frames ofother classes are not dropped to in any case.Beyond 25% of use rate, all frames of class 0 are dropped. An identical reasoning can be held forclasses 1, 2 and 3.

The behavior is the same one in the case of the "Second Profile", only the value of thethresholds changes.

First Profile

Second Profile

1 25 50 75 99

25

Class 0 Class 1 Class 2 Class 3100

% Loss

Buffer use rate

1 69 90 97 99

Class 0

Class 1

Class 2 Class 3

Buffer use rate

% Loss

100

25



"Pause" mode :

In the “pause” mode, the equipment at the ends of the Ethernet link may send or receivespecific frames to temporarily suspend sending traffic. Operation in “pause” mode depends on thecapacities being allocated to the equipment : Autonegotiation field and Pause Capability field.

If “Pause Negotiation” status is equal to “Disabled”, the pause mechanism is disabled. Thusthe equipment is able neither to handle incoming “pause” frames nor to send them.

If “Pause Negotiation” status is equal to “Received”, the equipment will handle incoming“pause” frames.

If the “Pause Negotiation” status is equal to “Sent” and depending on the buffer use rate, theequipment will send a “pause” frame to ask the other end to suspend its traffic.

If the “Pause Negotiation” status is equal to “Sent & Received”, the equipment is able to handleboth sending and reception “pause” frames.

High Threshold defines the buffer use rate from which the equipment will cease sending“pause” frames in order to tell the other end to suspend sending.

Low Threshold defines the buffer use rate under which the equipment will have stop sending“pause” frames in order to allow the other end to restart sending.

Since the Ethernet “Pause” frames apply to all flow without distinction, no classification isassociated there.

2.2.10.4 - Congestion management in reception WAN

The flow received from the SDH for a transmission on the gigabit Ethernet port has a simplifiedcongestion management, limited to the treatment of the “pauses” frames received from the oppositeEthernet Local. A buffer is used to prevent from immediate rejections, but those are inevitable if therequest for suspending frame transmission continue.

100

% Loss

XOFF framesending

Stop sendingXOFF frame

Low Threshold High Threshold0

Buffer use rate



2.3 - CARDS PROTECTION

2.3.1 - PDH cards protection

The PDH cards (63E1 or 3E3DS3) are inserted in the TRB 5 to TRIB 8 slots.

A PDH card inserted in TRIB 2 (63E1) or TRIB 1 (3E3DS3) allows to have a function of 1:n (n=4 max)card protection provided that it is configured in protection mode as following :

- select in the card menu the "PDH Board Protection" item- check "1:n"- define the slots of the PDH cards to be protected in "Board to Protect" (the cases to check appearaccording to the present PDH cards in the shelf)

The traffic switching on the protection card is automatic since a default (card default, missing card,auto test defautl) is detected on the working card ; however the return of the traffic on this card,aferrepair, is not automatic : it is necessary to select "Manual Switch to Working" in the operation window.

If the traffic of a defective card has been switched on the protection card, no other traffic of anothercard, even defective, can be switched on the help.

If several cards ask to switch their traffic simultaneously on the protection card, the card in the biggernumber slot TRIB will have the priority.Example : the TRIBn+1 slot est more important than TRIBn.

In the absence of protection and in the event that TRIB 5 to TRIB 8 slots would be occupied, a PDHcard can be inserted in TRIB 2 or TRIB 1 to function in working mode provided that it is configured it asfollowing :

- select in the card menu the "PDH Board Protection" item- check "No protection"- associate at this card a free LTU proposed in the dropdown of the "LTU" window

The choice of operating of the card will be validated by clicking on "Apply".

The traffic alarm "Traffic not provided" is activated if :

- the traffic of a working card in defect switches on a protection card itself in defect- a working card is in breakdown and that no protection has been configured

This alarm is provided by the working card.

2.3.2 - SWITCH HO/LO card protection

A shelf equipped of two SWITCH HO/LO cards allows to have a function of cards protection 1:1.If a SWITCH HO/LO card falls in breakdown, (auto test default, fuse default, board missing) the traffcswitches automatically on the other card.

The "Maintenance" menu allows, after repair or replacement, to select the card used for traffic.

This menu offers to the operator a manual switch, no reversible ; this switch will be refused if theSWITCH HO/LO card is not operational.



2.3.3 - PSU card protection

According to the type of SWITC HO/LO card, one or two PSU cards are mandatory for the equipment.

If a second or third card is inserted in the shelf, it allows a function of 1:1 or 1:2 card protection.

As long as no problem appears, loads of power supply are distributed on the present cards ; if one ofthem breaks down, loads are automatically balanced on the one or other cards.

2.4 - SUB-ASSEMBLY REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES

REMINDERS : Whenever handling a card, be sure to wear a tightly secured antistaticbracelet on your wrist connected to ground.

To clean optical connectors, use a pressurized air can.

2.4.1 - Replacement of an Interface card

Remarks :

• Alarms will appear when a card is extracted from the shelf. To avoid the alarms and ALA 1and ALA 2 loops from being fed back, the card should be declared as out of service.

• Each module can be extracted or inserted without intervening on the other modules or ontheir wiring. The only disturbance will concern the traffic in the concerned module.

Procedure :

The procedure described below can be applied, unless otherwise specified, to all the cards inthe equipment.

1. Switch any possible protected traffic to the redundant card. If the yellow "Traffic" indicatorLED goes off, the replacement will not result in any disturbance.

2. Set the card "out of service" using the web browser.

3. Remove the external connections from the front panel of the card.

NOTE : When the external optical fibers are disconnected, install the protectedcovers on the connectors.

4. Unscrew and remove the card observing the mandatory safety measures relative toelectrostatic discharges.

5. Place the card in an antistatic bag.

6. Remove the new card from its antistatic bag.

7. Carefully insert the card in its slot while observing the mandatory safety precautions relativeto electrostatic discharges and secure it.

8. Perform the connections on the front panel of the card.

NOTE : For the optical cards, remove the protective covers from the connectors.

9. Configure the card if necessary and activate the card.



2.4.2 - Replacement of a SWITCH HO/LO card

REMINDER : If you do not have a redundant SWITCH HO/LO card, this operationwill result in total interruption of traffic.

WARNING : Never replace a SWITCH HO/LO card if a CTRL-2G card is not inposition or has failed (STATUS indicator LEDs off) : inserting aSWITCH HO/LO card in the shelf without a CTRL-2G card can resultin interruption of traffic.

Replacement procedure if a redundant SWITCH HO/LOcard is present :

1. Switch protected traffic to the redundant SWITCH HO/LOcard.

2. Wait for the yellow "traffic" indicator LED to go off. When the traffic indicator LED is off, thecard can be replaced without causing any disturbance.

3. Set the card "out of service" on the web browser.




7. Carefully insert the new card in its slot observing the mandatory safety measures relative toelectrostatic discharges and secure it.

8. Activate the card.

9. Wait for 2 or 3 minutes, duration for the holdover automaton to validate the currentsynchronization source.

2.4.3 - Replacement of a PSU module

Procedure :

1. Using the maintenance menu, set the PSU module to be replaced to "Off".

NOTE : If the PSU modules are not to the number of three, the transition to "Off"will be rejected.

2. Wait for the green indicator LED to go off and the red indicator LED to come on.

3. On the MMI, the maintenance panel will be displayed (refresh the shelf view).

4. Unscrew and remove the PSU module observing the mandatory safety measures relative toelectrostatic discharges.

5. Place the module in an antistatic bag.

6. Remove the new module from its antistatic bag.

7. Insert a new module observing the mandatory safety measures relative to electrostaticdischarges and secure it.

NOTE : The new module is set into service automatically once inserted.



Remarque :

If the equipment receives a SWITCH HO/LO card and if one only PSU card is inserted in theshelf, the equipment went to degraded mode.

To leave this degraded mode, see the chapter 6 "DEGRADED MODE"

2.4.4 - Replacement of a CTRL-2G card

The CTRL-2G card can be extracted or inserted without disturbing the traffic transiting through anADR2500 eXtra.

Without a CTRL-2G card in the shelf, the automatic control functions relative to protection,synchronization of the equipment and management of the shelf assembly are not fulfilled.

Exception : Even without a CTRL-2G card in place, switchover from a failing “in traffic” SWITCHHO/LO card to its protection card is achieved. A CTRL-2G card is needed to put any card type intoservice though.

• If the CTRL-2G card inserted is different from that previously removed and no powersupply cutout has occurred since the card was extracted, the equipment configuration willbe preserved in its original condition. A date and time set operation is however required tocomplete the equipment configuration procedure.

• If a new CTRL-2G card is inserted in a shelf which is not powered up, the configurationsaved in the CTRL-2G card will be applied to the equipment on power up. A date and timeset operation is however required to complete the equipment configuration procedure.

•

Procedure :

1. Remove the external connections on the front panel of the card.2




5. Carefully insert the card in its slot observing the mandatory safety measures relative toelectrostatic discharges and secure it.


7. Configure the card if necessary.

Remark :

If the four LEDs permanently flash, this means the card went to degraded mode

To leave this degraded mode, see the chapter 6 "DEGRADED MODE"



2.4.5 - Replacement of a CCU-2G card

Warning : As the shelf power supply connector is located on the CCU card, it is mandatory todisconnect the powering cable from the POWER/ALM connector before CCU card extraction, toprevent any risk of contact with hazardous voltages while manipulating the card.

Procedure :

1. Remove the external connections on the front panel of the card.




5. Carefully insert the card in its slot observing the mandatory safety measures relative toelectrostatic discharges and secure it.


7. Configure the card if necessary.

2.4.6 - Replacement of FAN-2G module

The FAN-2G module contains three redundant FAN-2G to secure adequate ventilation shouldany of the fans fail. Fan failures are detected on the card by monitoring the current consumed.

As soon as a default is detected on one of fans or on the power supply, it is necessary to replacethe FAN-2G module.

The FAN-2G module can be removed and replaced with no disturbance to traffic.

Procedure :

1. Unscrew and remove the module observing the mandatory safety measures relative toelectrostatic discharges.

2. Place the module in an antistatic bag.

3. Remove the new module from its antistatic bag.

4. Carefully insert the module in its position observing the mandatory safety measures relativeto electrostatic discharges and secure it.

2.4.7 - Preventive maintenance

In order to avoid a deterioration in the efficiency of ventilation, it is advised to be careful that thegrids of ventilation and blades of the modules FAN-2G are not fouled. A regular check and, ifnecessary, a dusting is recommended.

3 – SPARE PARTS AND CABLES


3 SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

3.1 - LIST OF NO ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS

Mnemonic Name No rohs code

ADR2500 eXtra

Shelf ADR2500 EXTRA SHELF 251 313 627

Shelf without LTU ADR2500 EXTRA SHELF NO LTU 252 711 385

FAN-2G FAN MODULE 2G 251 313 700

KIT FACIA FAN KIT FACIA FAN SAGEM 288 069 950

SWITCH HO/LO cover SWITCH COVER 251 089 333

PSU cover PSU COVER 251 089 346

Trib/line cover TRIB/LINE COVER 251 089 354

1 LTU cover 1 LTU COVER 251 311 248

3 LTU cover 3 LTU COVER 251 311 219

Cards

LTU21E120 21E120 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 251 313 635


LTU3E3DS3 3E3DS3 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 251 313 656

PSU-2G POWER SUPPLY UNIT 2G 251 253 537

PSU-160 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 160 W 251 515 677

CCU-2G COMMON CONNECTION UNIT 2G 251 313 680

CTRL-2G CONTROL UNIT 2G 251 313 698

AUX AUXILIARY UNIT 251 049 173

SWITCH HO/LO 64 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 251 253 529

SW32HOLO 32 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 251 607 962

63E1 63E1 TRIBUTARY UNIT 251 313 677

63E1FA 63E1TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONT ACCESS 252 485 331

3E3DS3 3E3DS3 TRIBUTARY UNIT 251 313 669

3E3DS3FA 3x34/45 TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONTACCESS

251 943 074

4ERE 4X STM-1 ELECTRICAL UNIT 251 049 152

4xS1.1 4X STM-1 S-1.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 524 259

4xL1.1 4X STM-1 L-1.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 530 434



Table 3-1 : List of no rohs ADR2500 eXtra items

3 – SPARES PARTS AND CABLES




4xMM1 4X STM-1 MM1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 735 360

4xSTM1-SFP (*) 4XSTM1 SFP UNIT 252 578 425

S4.1 STM-4 S-4.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 049 149

L4.1 STM-4 L-4.1 OPTICAL UNIT 251 122 550


STM4-SFP (*) STM4 SFP UNIT 252 578 446







U16.2 STM-16 OPTICAL UNIT for booster 251 120 861

STM16-SFP (*) STM16 SFP UNIT 252 578 438

GIG-E SX (**) GIG-E SX UNIT 251 068 024

GIG-E LX GIG-E LX UNIT 251 560 362

GIG-E ZX GIG-E ZX UNIT 251 582 884

1GE-DM ZX 1GE DUAL MODE ZX UNIT 252 583 398


2GE-DM-SFP 2GE DUAL MODE SFP UNIT 252 668 670

GFP150 eXtra GFP150EXTRA PLATINUM 251 435 209

Adaptation Kits

19 IN KIT 19 IN MOUNTING KIT 251 436 793

ETSI KIT ETSI MOUNTING KIT 251 436 805

Units

OPTICAL BOOSTER +14 DBM 251 125 832

MUX 10000 T 251 156 410

MUX 10000 A 251 163 949

Table 3-2 : List of no rohs ADR2500 eXtra items

(*) The STMx-SFP cards will be equipped with the choice with one of the types of codifiedSFP modules. Table 3-4 : List of rohs optical modules of ADR2500 eXtra

(**) "GIG-E SX" corresponds to previously named GIG-E card of ADR 2500c



3.2 - LIST OF ROHS ADR2500 EXTRA ITEMS


ADR2500 eXtra

FAN-2G FAN MODULE 2G SAGEM 252 727 817

Cards



LTU3E3DS3 3E3DS3 LINE TERMINATION UNIT 252 728 306

PSU-160 POWER SUPPLY UNIT 160 W 252 727 838

CCU-2G COMMON CONNECTION UNIT 2G 252 728 210

CTRL-2G CONTROL UNIT 2G SAGEM 252 763 339

AUX AUXILIARY UNIT 252 728 249

SWITCH HO/LO 64 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 252 728 228

SW32HOLO 32 VC4 HO/LO SWITCH UNIT 252 758 705

63E1 63E1 TRIBUTARY UNIT 252 728 231

63E1FA 63E1TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONT ACCESS 252 794 553

3E3DS3 3E3DS3 TRIBUTARY UNIT 252 790 203

3E3DS3FA 3x34/45 TRIBUTARY UNIT FRONTACCESS

252 790 191

4ERE 4X STM-1 ELECTRICAL UNIT 252 728 260

4xSTM1-SFP 4XSTM1 SFP UNIT 252 790 211

STM4-SFP STM4 SFP UNIT 252 790 224


STM16-SFP STM16 SFP UNIT 252 790232

GIG-E ZX GIG-E ZX UNIT 252 728 314



2GE-DM-SFP 2GE DUAL MODE SFP UNIT 252 790 245

GFP150 eXtra GFP150EXTRA PLATINUM 252 728 252

Adaptation Kits

19 IN KIT 19 IN MOUNTING KIT 252 759 864

ETSI KIT ETSI MOUNTING KIT 252 759 905

Table 3-3 : List of rohs ADR2500 eXtra items




Optical modules

SFP DDM S-1.1 MODULE 252 709 939

SFP DDM L-1.1 MODULE 252 586 245


SFP DDM S-4.1 MODULE 252 709 950



SFP DDM L-16.1 MODULE 252 709 968

SFP DDM L-16.2 MODULE 252 586 373

SFP DDM SX MODULE 252 791 015

SFP DDM LX MODULE 252 791 002

SFP DDM ZX MODULE 252 791 023

Table 3-4 : List of rohs optical modules of ADR2500 eXtra

3.3 - LIST OF AVAILABLE CABLES

Card Name Length Code

LTU 21E75 E1 INPUT or E1 OUTPUT

75 ohms SUB D St 21x2 Mbit/s In orOut(½ cable)

2,5 m12 m

251 581 853251 581 874

LTU 21E12063E1FA

E1 INPUT or E1 OUTPUT

120 ohms SUB D St 21x2 Mbit/s Inor Out(½ cable)

2,5 m12 m

251 581 808251 581 829

LTU3E3DS33E3DS3FA

TR or REC 1x155 Mbit/s 75 ohms1.0/2.3(½ cable)

TR or REC 3x155 Mbit/s 75 ohms1.0/2.3(½ cable)

2,5 m12 m

2,5 m12 m

55 670 59255 670 594

55 670 60255 670 604

Table 3-5 : List of available cables




CCU-2G SYNC – SYNCHRO 120 Ω

(½ cable)

2,5 m

12 m

251 008 309

251 008 320

SYNC – BNC SYNCHRO 75 Ω(adapter)

(whole cable - one T3 input / one T4output)

30 cm 251 118 155

LOOPS – (GTR + TS)

(½ cable)

2,5 m

12 m

6 013 628

6 013 161

POWER

Toward PAPA (whole cable)

Free (½ cable)

3 m

3 m

251 361 272

251 361 285

CTRL-2G COMM – COM VT100 1,8 m 4 980 214

ETH – Ethernet

Direct connection to a HUB

Cross over connection to a PC

3 m

3 m

55 670 422

55 670 610

AUX V11 access to ARDAX/EOW300

(Cable supplied with VDSequipment)

3 m 55 670 253

4ERE TR or REC4x155 Mbit/s 1.0/2.3 75 ohms(½ cable)

2,5 m12 m

55 670 60255 670 604

GFP150eXtra

ETH – Ethernet

Straight-through cable

Cross-over cable

3 m

3 m

55 670 422

55 670 610

Optical cards 10DB 1,3/1,5µm SC/PCOptical attenuator

10DB 1,3/1,5µm LC/PCOptical attenuator

187 835 698

TR or REC - Optical jumper

SC-PC/FC-PC

2,5 m3,4 m4,6 m5,8 m7 m

8,2 m9,4 m12 m15 m20 m

251 035 997251 036 001251 036 019251 036 022251 036 030251 036 043251 036 051251 036 064251 036 072251 036 085





TR or REC - Optical jumpers

SC-PC/FC-PC with 10 db attenuator

2,5 m5,8 m12 m20 m

251 091 700251 091 656251 091 669251 091 648

TR or REC - Optical jumper

SC-PC/SC-PC

1,5 m2,5 m3,4 m4,6 m5,8 m7 m

8,2 m9,4 m12 m15 m20 m

251 035 872 251 035 880 251 035 893 251 036 209 251 036 212 251 036 220 251 036 233 251 036 241 251 036 251 251 036 262 251 036 275

TR or REC - Optical jumber

SC-PC/SC-PC with 10 dB attenuator

2,5 m5,8 m12 m20 m

251 091 627251 091 635251 091 677251 091 698

TR or REC (STMn-SFP cards)

Optical jumper LC-PC/LC-PC

2.5 m5 m10 m15 m20 m50 m

251 559 377 251 559 504 251 559 517 251 559 525 251 559 567 251 559 570

TR or REC (STMn-SFP cards)

Optical jumper LC-PC/SC-PC

2.5 m5 m10 m15 m20 m50 m

251 454 262 251 454 283 251 454 296 251 454 402 251 454 410 251 454 423

TR or REC – Multimode optical

jumber SC-PC/SC-PC

2,5 m4,6 m7,0 m

251 157 433251 157 446251 157 454


4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page A4-1

4 TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT

Optical characteristics (see § 1.3.8 Connection of STM-1 / STM-4 / STM-16)optical access points

Mechanical characteristics

Height 14U (623 mm)Width 19" or ETSI (446 mm)Depth 238 mmWeight 11,6 kg empty + 2,3 kg (two brackets) ; 26 kg for

maximum configurationProtection Index (PI) Corresponds to PI of used rackSFP optical modules Small Form factor Pluggable Transceiver MultiSource

Agreement 14 Sept 2000

Consumption See

Table 4-3

Environment characteristics

Mechanical ETS 300 019Climatic condition ETS 300 019Operating temperature - 5°C to + 45°CExtended operating temperature -25 °C to + 55°C (MTBF [Mean Time Between

Failure] slightly downgraded)Transport and storage temperature - 40°C to + 70°CRelative humidity < 85%Electrical NF EN 300 386 (April 2000)Interference voltage (radioelectricfrequency emissions)

NF EN 55022

Safety NF EN 60950-1 (Avril 2002)Power ETS 300 132-2 (equipment is SELV)

Table 4-1 : Technical characteristics of ADR2500 eXtra



EQUIPMENT

Predicted reliability (1)

FDP 3.73 10-6

FAN-2G 5.65 10-6

LTU21E120 0.25 10-6

LTU21E75 0.25 10-6

LTU3E3DS3 0.14 10-6

PSU-2G 2.58 10-6

PSU-160 1.44 10-6

CCU-2G 0.41 10-6

CTRL-2G 0.65 10-6

AUX 0.11 10-6

SWITCH HO/LO 2.10 10-6

SW32HOLO 1.71 10-6

63E1 0.58 10-6

63E1FA 0.90 10-6

3E3DS3 0.52 10-6

3E3DS3FA 0.57 10-6

4xS1.1, 4xL1.1, 4xL1.2, 4xMM1 3.67 10-6

2xL1.1 1.92 10-6

1xL1.2 1.07 10-6

4ERE 0.39 10-6

4xSTM1-SFP (without optical module) 0.24 10-6

SFP S1.1 Module (2) 0.26 10-6SFP L1.1 Module (2) 0.35 10-6SFP L1.2 Module (2) 0.39 10-6S4.1, L4.1, L4.2 1.08 10-6

STM4-SFP (without optical module) 0.18 10-6

SFP S4.1 Module (2) 0.27 10-6

SFP L4.1 Module (2) 0.31 10-6

SFP L4.2 Module (2) 0.75 10-6

L16.1, L16.2 0.99 10-6

L16.2+, U16.2 0.93 10-6

STM16-SFP (without optical module) 0.41 10-6

SFP L16.1 Module 0.95 10-6

SFP L16.2 Module 0.95 10-6

GIG-E SX, GIG-E LX, GIG-E ZX 2.72 10-6

1GE-DM-ZX 1.93 10-6

2GE-DM-ZX 2.80 10-6

2GE-DM-SFP (without optical module) 1.08 10-6

SFP SX Module (2) 0.13 10-6

SFP LX Module (2) 0.17 10-6

GFP150 eXtra 1.08 10-6


(1) The predicted reliability computations have been realized with the RAM COMMANDERsoftware Release 7.2 according to the UTE C 80-810 RDF 2000 standard under ambienttemperature conditions of 25°C (with ventilation conditions ensuring an average internaltemperature in the rack not exceeding 40°C) and precise conditions relative to theenvironment (on ground, fixed and protected), qualification and age of the components. Anychanges to these hypotheses will provide different results.

(2) Predicted reliability calculated for a case temperature of 40°C



EQUIPMENT

Power consumption (3) per sub-assembly (measured on 48V power supply)

LTU21E120 3.2 WLTU21E75 3.2 WLTU3E3DS3 1.7 WCCU-2G + FAN-2G 11 WCTRL-2G 4.6 WAUX 1.1 WSWITCH HO/LO 34.5 WSW32HOLO 21.6 W63E1 6 W63E1FA 15 W3E3DS3 7.8 W3E3DS3FA 9.3 W4xS1.1 5.1 W4xL1.1 5.1 W2xL1.1 3.2 W4xL1.2 5,1 W1xL1.2 2.4 W4ERE 12.5 W4xMM1 5.1 W4xSTM1-SFP (equipped with fouroptical modules)

5 W

S4.1 3.7 WL4.1 3.7 WL4.2 3.7 WSTM4-SFP (equipped with oneoptical module)

3.7 W

L16.1 8.0 WL16.2 8.5 WL16.2+, 9.5 W (4)U16.2 9.5 W (4)STM16-SFP (equipped with oneoptical module)

8 W

GIG-E SX, LX, ZX 22 W1GE-DM-ZX 16.3 W2GE-DM-ZX 18.6 W2GE-DM-SFP (equipped with twooptical modules)

18.8 W

GFP150 eXtra 14.6 W


(3) These power consumption data are typical values and can be used to evaluate thedissipation. 20% should be added when estimating the peak values governing sizing of thepower supply devices. This provides for transient variations in consumption and variations inefficiency of the converter as a function of the total power.Caution : an additional 10% should be added if a 72V power supply is used.

(4) This consumption can reach the max value of 12,5 W at laser power up, during itsoperation temperature acquisition (for less than 5 seconds).

5 - START-UP GUIDE


5 START-UP GUIDE

IntroductionThank you for acquiring the ADR2500 eXtra equipment.

The start-up procedure is supplied with the equipment to help you, using examples, to configure it in accordance with the topology of the network tobe built.

5.1 - INSTALLING THE EQU IPMENT

a) Unpack the equipment

b) Insert and screw the cards into the slots used

c) Connect the power cable and power up the equipment

d) After a few seconds, check that the green « STATUS » LED of the Controller card comes on steady

5 - START-UP GUIDE


5.2 - CONNECTING TO AN ADR2500 EXTRA

Minimum PC characteristics

Description Configuration 1 Configuration 2 Observations

Processor 450 MHz Pentium III

Memory 64 MB 128 MB

Display 1024x768

RS232 serial interface SUB-D straight cable9pts Male / Female

InterfacesEthernet 10 Base T network card RJ45 crossed Ethernet

cable

Operating system Windows NT4 / 2000 Windows XP

HyperTerminal for Windows

SoftwaresWeb Browser : Internet Explorer1 5.5 (*)

(*) The operating PC can be equipped with Internet Explorer 6.0 (delivered release with Windows XP)

5 - START-UP GUIDE


In order to be managed, the ADR2500 eXtra subrack must have the Equipment address and the Ethernet port address configured in two different sub-networks.

The Equipment and Ethernet port addresses are configured using the Windows HyperTerminal application.

Connect the equipment's "COMM" port to an unused "COM" port of the PC using the 9pts Male / Female SUB-D straight cable

Power up the PC

Start Windows and run the HyperTerminal application(Menus: Start/Programs/Accessories/HyperTerminal)

Give a name and select an icon for the connection then apply the choices

Select the PC's "COM" port that is connected to the equipment then apply the choice

Configure the port parameters according to the characteristics below then apply the settings

• Bits per second : 19200• Data bits : 8• Parity : None• Stop bits : 1• Flow control : None

Save the connection settings. The next time you will run the HyperTerminal, just click on the connection icon to connect to theequipment.

Press "ENTER" twice on the keyboardThe MAIN MENU window appears on screen.

Configuring the Equipment address

The equipment address will be used to notify alarms and events to the Manager. This address is mandatory when using Unnumbered PPP links ( In theexample below, the Equipment address is 192.168.114.30 ).

5 - START-UP GUIDE


Follow the instructions below to configure the Equipment address

Choose menu 1 andconfirm by pressing"ENTER" key on thekeyboard.

5 - START-UP GUIDE


The IP address can be input with or without non-significant "0" :192.168.114.30 or 192.168.114.030

The equipment will be restated after the configuration of the Ethernet port address.

Answer the questionsand confirm each oneby pressing "ENTER"key on the keyboard.

In this example, theEquipment addressis 192.168.114.30

5 - START-UP GUIDE


Configuring the Ethernet port

This port's address must be located in the same network as the PC's Ethernet port one (in the example given below, the sub-network address is135.11.114.8 and the sub-network mask is 255.255.255.252).

NOTE: With Windows 9x, the PC's address can be viewed by selecting (right-click) Properties of the Network Neighborhood icon, then (left-click)Properties of the TCP/IP component (TCP/IP -> "Network Card Name").With Windows NT, the PC's address can be viewed by selecting (right-click) Properties of the Network Neighborhood icon, then (left-click)Properties of the TCP/IP component (TCP/IP protocol).With Windows 2000/XP, the PC's address can be viewed by selecting, in succession, (right-click) Properties of the My Network Placesicon, Properties of the Local Area Connection icon, then (left-click) Properties of the TCP/IP component (Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)).

Follow the instructions below to configure the equipment's Ethernet port

Choose menu 2 andconfirm by pressing"ENTER" key on thekeyboard.

5 - START-UP GUIDE


The IP address can be input with or without non-significant "0" :135.11.114.10 or 135.011.114.010

After you type y to confirm the question Save interface parameters (y/n)? there are a few seconds delay before display of thesentence You must restart this equipment for modifications to take effect.

After restarting the equipment, the word Password: appears at the top left of the window. Close HyperTerminal application.

The equipment can now be managed by an HTTP browser.

Answer the questionsand confirm each oneby pressing "ENTER"key on the keyboard.

In this example, theaddress of the unit'sEthernet port is135.11.114.10

5 - START-UP GUIDE


Managing the equipment

Example:

The equipment is managed by an HTTP browser.

Connect the Controller card's "ETH" port to the PC's Ethernet card using the RJ45 crossed Ethernet cable The yellow LED of the Controller card's "ETH" connector must go on.

Run the HTTP browser If the display is set to 800x600, select "Smaller" with INTERNET EXPLORER 5.x or superior. (Consult the help menu of the HTTPbrowser to set the font size)

On the home page, complete the "Address" field with the Equipment address (192.168.114.30)

The window Welcome on the SAGEM ADR2500 eXtra's site appears on the screen. By default , there is no Password; click on "Apply"

The window Shelf view appears on the screen.

To be able to manage the equipment, consult the help menu by clicking on the Help link of the main window.

5 - START-UP GUIDE


5.3 - CONFIGURING A PPP PORTA PPP (Point to Point Protocol) port of an equipment must be configured when extending a network, just as for modification of the Equipmentaddress and the Ethernet port, using the HTTP browser.

In the example below, the instructions are given for configuring the PPP2 port. Configuration of the PPP1 and PPP3 to PPP34 ports is identical tothe PPP2 port.

Connect the Controller card's "ETH" port to the PC's Ethernet card using the RJ45 crossed Ethernet cable The yellow LED of the Controller card's "ETH" connector must go on.

Run the HTTP browser

In the home page, complete the "Address" field with the Equipment address (192.168.114.30)

The window Welcome on the SAGEM ADR2500 eXtra's site appears on screen. By default, there is no Password; click on "Apply"

The window Shelf view appears on screen.

Click on the Controller card’s “ETH” port then on the “Interfaces Configuration” link to configure the equipment's PPP2 port

Click on the “Apply” button thenvalidate the reboot prompt with the“Restart Now” button.

After restarting the equipment, thePPP2 port is configured.

5 - START-UP GUIDE


5.4 - VIEWING THE ROUTIN G CONFIGURATION

Click on the “Routing Table” link to view the equipment's routing configuration.

Example :

5 - START-UP GUIDE


5.5 - BUILDING A POINT-T O-POINT LINK

This chapter describes the IP configuration of the interfaces for a bus link using an example.

For each equipment, you can configure the Ethernet port, the Equipment address and the 34 PPP (Point to Point Protocol) software ports fromPPP1 to PPP34 (DCCr or DCCm). PPP1 software port is assigned to the physical port LINE1, PPP2 software port is assigned to the physical port LINE2and the PPP3 to PPP34 software ports are assigned to one of the 32 physical ports corresponding to the slots TRIB1 to TRIB8. You can also assign twoVC12 channels, P#1 and P#2, to each PPP3 to PPP34 software ports.

Example:

The two ADR2500 eXtra units can be managed by an HTTP browser.

Refer to the chapter Connecting to an ADR2500 eXtra for managing the equipment by the HTTP browser.

Refer to the chapter Connecting to anADR2500 eXtra to configure the Ethernetport and the Equipment address of eachequipment.

Refer to the chapter Configuring a PPPport to configure the PPP ports of each

The gateway adress matches the Ethernetport address of the equipment opposite thePC.

5 - START-UP GUIDE


5.6 - BUILDING A BUS LINK

This chapter describes the IP configuration of the interfaces for a bus link using an example.


Example:

The three ADR2500 eXtra units can be operated using an HTTP browser.

Refer to the chapter Connecting to an ADR2500 eXtra for operating the equipment with the HTTP browser.



5 - START-UP GUIDE


5.7 - BUILDING A RING

This chapter describes the IP configuration of the interfaces for a ring network using an example.


Example:

The three ADR2500 eXtra units can be managed by an HTTP browser. The management links are secured by the OSPF protocol.

Refer to the chapter Connecting to an ADR2500 eXtra for managing the equipment by the HTTP browser.



i t

5 - START-UP GUIDE


5.8 - MANAGING EQUIPME NT THROUGH THE NETWORK OF A DIFFERENT SUPPLIER

This chapter describes the IP configuration of the interfaces for a network whose management links pass through a different manufacturersequipment.


Example:

Refer to the chapter Connecting to an ADR2500 eXtra to configurethe Ethernet port and the Equipment address of each equipment.

Refer to the chapter Configuring a PPP port to configure the PPPports of each equipment.

Refer to the next page for more details on configuring the PPP3 port ofADR2500 eXtra N°3 and the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N°4.

5 - START-UP GUIDE


Details on configuring the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N°3 and the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N°4

Choice of the management VC12

1. The choice of the VC12 i is restricted to 20 first ones VC12 of aTUG-3 and the VC12 i+1 is unusable.

2. Only the VC12 numbers whose next one is free are proposed inthe ports list.

Configuring the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N°3

3. Configure the PPP3 port with HTTP browserRefer to the chapter Configuring a PPP port for the procedure

4. Create a connection with the HTTP browser between the P#1port and the T2:4#1_62 port of Trib2 Port4.Consult the ADR2500 eXtra help menu to create a connectionby clicking on the HELP link of the main window.

Configuring the PPP3 port of ADR2500 eXtra N°4

1. Configure the PPP3 port with HTTP browserRefer to the chapter Configuring a PPP port for the procedure

2. Create a connection with the HTTP browser between the P#1port and the T1:1#1_62 port of Trib1 Port1.Consult the ADR2500 eXtra help menu to create a connection byclicking on the HELP link of the main window.

5 - START-UP GUIDE


6 - DEGRADED MODE


6 DEGRADED MODE

6.1 - DEFINITION

The degraded mode is an operation mode in which the CTRL-2G card software can switch whenstarting, after a CTRL-2G card replacement (maintenance) or a shelf power supply cut.

The software switches in this mode on at least one of following cases :

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the FPGA codes of the GIG-E pack orbetween the CTRL software and the GIG-E software code in CTRL Flash (missing orincompatible code in Flash)

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the FPGA codes of the GFP150 eXtra packor between the CTRL software and the GFP150 eXtra software code in CTRL Flash (missingor incompatible code in Flash)

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the current shelf configuration (database inthe CCU-2G card memory)

- incompatibility between the CTRL software and the shelf current states memory ("shelf hotdata" in the CCU-2G card memory) ; these data persist on CTRL-2G card extraction but onshelf power supply cut

- FPGA code change between already loaded codes in shelf cards and present codes inCTRL-2G card Flash

- a GIG-E software code change between already loaded codes in shelf GIG-E cards andpresent code in CTRL-2G card Flash

- a GFP150 eXtra software code change between already loaded codes in shelf GFP150 eXtracards and present code in CTRL-2G card Flash

- only one operational PSU associated to a SWITCH HO/LO card (minimum 2 cards aremandatory)

The CTRL software switches in this mode in order to avoid to :

- loss the current shelf configuration- loss the informations of the shelf current states- switch to a default card- load again a FPGA code or a GIG-E software code or a GFP150 eXtra software code

and so, to avoid a temporarily or definitely transmission cutting

These cases correlate, either to CTRL-2G card replacement by a card with not updated Flash softwareor to momentary shelf power supply cut when the software or the FPGA codes in CTRL Flash are notall updated.

6 - DEGRADED MODE


To go out of this degraded mode :- in case of software incompatibility, the operator must locally act on the equipment by updatingthe software codes or the FPGA codes in CTRL-2G card memory Flash or by forcing thesoftware start-up,- in case of only one operational PSU associated to a SWITCH HO/LO card, insert a secondone or change the failed card. Software automatically reset until 2 PSU cards are in service.

6.2 - CHARACTERIZATION

In case of software incompatibility, the switch on this degraded mode is indicated by the four LEDS ofCTRL-2G card which flash (switched on red status + minor alarm LEDS, then switched on green status+ major alarm LEDS).The state of major and minor alarms output loops is not modified.

At VT100, by pressing "enter" touch, the switch reason is displayed.

In case of only one operational PSU, equipment reset every 20 seconds.

6.3 - POSSIBLE CAUSES

The causes are indicated in the "Definition" paragraph.Nine cases are managed by the CTRL software ; at each time, a message is displayed on the VT 100terminal which is connected on the CTRL-2G card COMM interface.

1) - The CTRL software code is not compatible with the FPGA codes of the Shelf, GIG-E or GFP150eXtra packs in Flash or some FPGA codes are missing in Flash.

«The CTRL software version is not compatible with Fpga codes in FlashIf you start CTRL software, incompatible or missing Fpga codeswill not be loaded and some cards will be declared failed!!!»

2) -The software code CTRL is not compatible with the GIG-E or GFP150 eXtra software codes or oneof these software codes is missing in Flash (only if a GIG-E card or a GFP150 eXtra card is configuredin the shelf).

«The CTRL software version is not compatible with Soft. codes in FlashIf you start CTRL software, incompatible or missing Soft. codeswill not be loaded and some cards will be declared failed!!!»

3) - The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is not compatible with the Shelf Database ; someparts of Database can be reinitialized, if continue.This case correlates to an older software CTRL than this which has generated the Shelf Database andwhich is not compatible with this databaseFor example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 2 CTRL software is replaced by a level 1

«The Shelf Database is not compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G cardIf you start CTRL software, part of Database (Configuration) will be lost !!!and the transmission will be broken up to new configuration»

6 - DEGRADED MODE


4) -The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is compatible with the Shelf Database providedsome parts of this database are converted.This case correlates to a more recent software CTRL than this which has generated the ShelfDatabase and which must convert. some parts of this databaseFor example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 1 CTRL software is replaced by a level 2If conversion is accepted by the operator, then if later the previous CTRL-2G card (level 1) is insertedagain, the converted parts of database will be reinitialized (case 3).

«The Shelf Database is compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G cardBut will be convert to a new format ; if you continue and convert the databaseyou will not insert the previous CTRL-2G card without breaking part of database !!!»

5) -The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is not compatible with the Shelf Hot Data ; someparts of Hot Data can be reinitialized, if continue.This case correlates to an older software CTRL than this which has generated the Shelf Hot Data andwhich is not compatible with this Hot Data.For example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 2 CTRL software is replaced by a level 1

«The Shelf Hot Data is not compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G cardIf you start CTRL software, part of Hot Data will be lostand transmission will be broken a few seconds»

6) -The software code of the inserted CTRL-2G card is compatible with the Shelf Hot Data providedsome parts of this Hot Data are converted.This case correlates to a more recent software CTRL than this which has generated the Shelf Hot Dataand which must convert. some parts of this Hot DataFor example, if a CTRL-2G card with a level 1 CTRL software is replaced by a level 2If conversion is accepted by the operator, then if later the previous CTRL-2G card is inserted again(level 1), the converted parts of Hot Data will be reinitialized (case 5).

«The Shelf Hot Data is compatible with CTRL software of the new CTRL-2G cardBut will be convert to a new format ; if you continue and convert Hot Datayou will not insert the previous CTRL-2G card without breaking transmission !!!»

7) -Some FPGA codes,already loaded on cards, must be loaded again because new releases exist inFlash.If a FPGA code must be loaded again, the transmission will be broken during the loading time and thecommissioning card.

«Some of Fpga codes will be loaded because the new CTRL-2G card containsother Fpga Codes in Flash than those loaded in hardwareIf you start CTRL software, transmission will be broken a few seconds»

8) – The GIG-E code present in flash is different from the GIG-E code in progress.If the GIG-E code must be loaded again, the transmission will be broken during the loading time andthe commissioning card.

«The Soft. codes will be loaded because the new CTRL-2G card containsother Soft. codes in Flash than those loaded in hardwareIf you start CTRL software, transmission will be broken a few seconds»

6 - DEGRADED MODE


9) – The GFP150 eXtra code present in flash is different from the GFP150 eXtra code in progress.If the GFP150 eXtra code must be loaded again, the transmission will be broken during the loadingtime and the commissioning card.

«The Soft. codes will be loaded because the new CTRL-2G card containsother Soft. codes in Flash than those loaded in hardwareIf you start CTRL software, transmission will be broken a few seconds»

10) – Only one operational PSU (in case of a SWITCH HO/LO card inserted in the shelf) :

«Two PSU cards are mandatory to supply the EquipmentInsert another PSU cardSoftware automatically reset until two PSU cards are in service»

6.4 - OPERATOR ACTIONS

The possible operator actions are of 3 kinds :

CTRL-2G card extraction

Extract the CTRL-2G card and update the Shelf, GIG-E and GFP150 eXtra packs on a non-operationalshelf.

VT100 operation

Connect a VT100 Terminal or an emulation VT100 PC on the CTRL-2G card, type "enter" in order to

- display the cause, the software release of the previous CTRL-2G in case of card change, thereleases of the Shelf, GIG-E and GFP150 eXtra packs in Flash- have access to the commands menu

The commands menu is as following :

1 - Switch GIG-E pack2 - Switch and Reset GIG-E pack3 - Switch GFP150 eXtra pack4 - Switch and Reset GFP150 eXtra pack5 - Switch and Reset Shelf pack6 - Start CTRL Code

1) - Switch GIG-E Pack

The software swaps the GIG-E packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then displays again thecodes in flash then displays again the commands menu.

2) - Switch and Reset GIG-E Pack

The software swaps the GIG-E packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then start again theCTRL software.

6 - DEGRADED MODE


3) - Switch GFP150 eXtra Pack

The software swaps the GFP150 eXtra packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then displaysagain the codes in flash then displays again the commands menu.

4) - Switch and Reset GFP150 eXtra Pack

The software swaps the GFP150 eXtra packs in Flash (selected and reserve) then startagain the CTRL software.

5) - Switch and Reset Shelf Pack

The software swaps the Shelf packs (CTRL software code, FPGA codes of Equipmentcards,…) in Flash (selected and reserve) then start again the CTRL software

6) - Start CTRL Code

Before hitting (6),.it is recommended to upgrade the Shelf, GIG-E and GFP150 eXtrapacks by using a "cross-over Ethernet" cable (between PC and CTRL-2G card) and thedefault IP address "135.10.114.11"

If the operator ignores the recommendations and ask the shelf operation starting, thetransmission risks to be disrupted.

Warning : when the software goes out of the degraded mode after the«Start CTRL Code», itcauses a CTRL software reset in order to be able to restart the Ethernet interface with theconfigured IP address (the default IP address in degraded mode is 135.10.114.11)

6 - DEGRADED MODE


HTTP operation

A reduced operation HTTP can be started in local via the Ethernet interface.The equipment IP address via the Ethernet interface is the default address 135.10.114.11.

A download window allows the download of the software codes that are not updated.

6 - DEGRADED MODE


A switching window of software packs allows to select the current packs and to restart the CTRLsoftware.

The VT100 operation is always possible in parallel with the HTTP operation

6 - DEGRADED MODE


6.5 - DEGRADED MODE SWITCH WARNING

On codes upgrade or downgrade from HTTP or from SNMP, the degraded mode is never used.

Nevertheless, we can have incompatibilities between the CTRL software and the FPGA codes or thesoftware codes of transmission cards.

In this case and if a momentary power supply cut appends, the CTRL-2G card software would fatallyswitch in degraded mode, that can have unfortunate consequences as an intervention on the site.

In order to prevent these problems, a « board defective » alarm is positioned on the CTRL-2G card.assoon as a risk exists.

An associated information to this alarm stipulates the cause which can be :

«Fpga Codes Missing or Not Compatible»

Unless one FPGA code in CTRL Flash is missing or is not compatible

«Soft. Codes Missing or Not Compatible»

The GIG-E code in CTRL Flash is missing or is not compatible (only if a GIG-E card isconfigured in the shelf).The GFP150 eXtra code in CTRL Flash is missing or is not compatible (only if a GFP150 eXtracard is configured in the shelf).

This alarm is updated on the download and switch of Shelf, GIG-E or GFP150 eXtra packs.

6 - DEGRADED MODE


6.6 - ACTIONS TO REALIZE ACCORDING TO CASES

Manual Action VT100 HTTP1) Incompatibility between the FPGA codes of the Shelf,

GIG-E or GFP150 eXtra packs and the CTRL software, orFPGA codes missing

Make them compatible by changing the Shelf pack or theGIG-E pack or the GFP150 eXtra pack

In case of start-up :The cards whose the FPGA codes are incompatible ormissing and which already are in service, stay in service,The cards whose the FPGA codes are incompatible ormissing and which must switch in service, pass in« defective » state,An alarm stay "ON" on the CTRL-2G. card « FPGA CodesMissing or not compatible »

- Replace the CTRL-2G card

- Update the CTRL-2G cardon another shelf then reinsertit.

- Start (Alarm "ON" on theCTRL-2G card)

- Switch and Reset of Shelfpack (return to the previousversion)

- Download of Shelf pack thenSwitch and Reset of Shelfpack

- Download of GIG-E packthen Switch and Reset ofGIG-E pack

- Download of GFP150 eXtrapack then Switch and Reset ofGFP150 eXtra pack


- Switch and Reset of GIG-Epack (return to the previousversion)

- Switch and Reset of GFP150eXtra pack (return to theprevious version)

Table 6-1 : Actions to realize according to cases

6 - DEGRADED MODE


Manual Action VT100 HTTP2) Incompatibility between the GIG-E software code or the

GFP150 eXtra software code and the CTRL software, orGIG-E software code missing or GFP150 eXtra softwarecode missing

Make them compatible by changing the Shelf pack or theGIG-E pack or the GFP150 eXtra pack

In case of start-up :The GIG-E cards or the GFP150 eXtra cards whose thesoftware code is incompatible or missing and whichalready are in service, stay in service,The GIG-E cards or the GFP150 eXtra cards whose thesoftware code is incompatible or missing and which mustswitch in service, pass in « defective » state,An alarm stay "ON" on the CTRL-2G. card « Soft CodesMissing or not compatible »

- Start (Alarm "ON" on theCTRL-2G card)











6 - DEGRADED MODE


Manual Action VT100 HTTP3) The database is incompatible with the CTRL software andwill be partly reinitialized> case of downgrade (switching to a CTRL software releaseprevious to the one that generated the database) of CTRLsoftware incompatible with the current database

Start at VT100 ; the database is partly reinitialized

Otherwise, return to the previous CTRL software code(Switch and Reset of Shelf pack)

- Start (the incompatible partsof database are reinitialized bydefault)


4) The database is incompatible with the CTRL software andwill be converted> case of upgrade (switching to a CTRL software releaseposterior to the one that generated the database) of CTRLsoftware incompatible with the current database

Start at VT100 ; the transmission will not be perturbed andthe database will be convertedThis message prevents that, after effected conversions,previous CTRL card insertion will cause a reinitialization ofsome parts of database (case 3).




- Start (the incompatible partsof database are converted





6 - DEGRADED MODE


Manual Action VT100 HTTP5) The Hot Data are incompatible with the CTRL software andwill be partly reinitialized> case of downgrade (switching to a CTRL software releaseprevious to the one that generated the Hot Data) of CTRLsoftware incompatible with the current Hot Data

Start at VT100 ; the Hot Data is partly reinitialized


- Start (the incompatible partsof Hot Data are reinitialized bydefault)


6) The Hot Data are incompatible with the CTRL software andwill be converted> case of upgrade (switching to a CTRL software releaseposterior to the one that generated the Hot Data) of CTRLsoftware incompatible with the current Hot Data

Start at VT100 , the transmission will not be perturbed andthe Hot Data will be convertedThis message prevents that a return to the previoussoftware will cause a loss of Hot Data part and will be ableto cause a temporarily transmission breaking (case 5).


- Replace the CTRL-2G. card


- Start (the incompatible partsof Hot Data are converted)





6 - DEGRADED MODE


Manual Action VT100 HTTP7), 8) and 9) Some FPGA or GIG-E or GFP150 eXtra codeswill be loaded, that can perturb the transmission.

Start at VT100

Otherwise, switch again to the previous Shelf pack or tothe previous GIG-E pack or to the GFP150 eXtra pack



- Start (the FPGA or thesoftware code of some cardswill be loaded)

- Switch and Reset of Shelfpack

- Switch and Reset of GIG-Epack

- Switch and Reset of GFP150eXtra pack







10) The shelf does not contain 2 operational PSU(in case of a SWITCH HO/LO card inserted in the shelf)

- If only one PSU card ispresent in the shelf, insert asecond one.- If 2 PSU cards are insertedin the shelf, replace the failedcard.Whatever is the case, wait forthe next automatic reset (all20s)


6 - DEGRADED MODE


7 – GFP150 EXTRA CARD


7 GFP150 EXTRA CARD

All the services mentioned in this document can be performed between the GFP150 eXtra cards from ADR2500eXtra but also between the GFP150 eXtra cards and the GFP150 cards from ADR155C.

Only the EPLine and EPLAN services can be interconnected with the EPLine service proposed by a 4E/FE cardof an ADR155C or of an ADR155CPE.

Each ADR2500 eXtra can include up to six GFP150 eXtra cards which must take place in "TRIB 1" or "TRIB 2"or "TRIB 5" to "TRIB 8" slots, in the left part of the slot.

7.1 - GFP150 EXTRA CARD AND SERVICES PRESENTATION

This chapter has for objective to guide the user for the commissioning of the GFP150 eXtra card in theADR2500 eXtra. It gives simple examples which should be easily adapted to the needs.

Services provided by GFP150 eXtra card in ADR2500 eXtra are :

• SMART LL – EPLine Service (from P2.1 release) :

The EPLine service (Ethernet Private Line) allows Ethernet 10/100 BaseT point to point interconnectionthrough a SDH network by using, for each connection, a VCG (VC-Group) based on virtual concatenation(VCAT). It is possible to obtain up to 8 independant point to point connections per GFP150 eXtra card. Rategranularity for each VCG is based either on VC12, or on VC3. With each VCG, it is possible to concatenatefrom 1 to 46 VC12 or from 1 to 2 VC3. The sum of the concatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 8ETH ports, cannot be above the STM1 payload (about 150Mbit/s).

• AGGREGATION – EVPLine Service (from P2.2 release) :

The EVPLine service (Ethernet Virtual Private Line) allows several Ethernet 10/100 BaseT point to pointinterconnection through a SDH network by using over shared VCG (VC-Group) based on virtualconcatenation (VCAT). These VMAN are separated by Tag VMAN, that adds a level of VLAN in relation tothe possible VLANs of Customers. It is possible to put until 16 aggregation traffic (VMAN) on a VCG. In theGFP150 eXtra card we can have 64 (63 if the MSTP protection is used) different VMAN maximum.The rate granularity for each VCG is the same as EPLine.

• SMART LL – EPLAN Service (from P2.1 release) :

The EPLAN service (Ethernet Private LAN) allows Ethernet 10/100 BaseT multipoint to multipointinterconnection through a SDH network by using, for each connection between two points of the network, aVCG (VC-Group) based on virtual concatenation (VCAT). It is possible to obtain up to 8 independantconnections per GFP150 eXtra card. Rate granularity for each VCG is based either on VC12, or on VC3.With each VCG, it is possible to concatenate from 1 to 46 VC12 or from 1 to 2 VC3. The sum of theconcatenated Ethernet rates, on the whole of the 8 ETH ports, cannot be above the STM1 payload (about150Mbit/s). In this case, each GFP150 eXtra card includes a switch allowing Ethernet 10/100 BaseTmultipoint to multipoint interconnection.



• AGGREGATION – EVPLAN Service (from P2.2 release) :

The EVPLAN service (Ethernet Virtual Private LAN) allows several Ethernet 10/100 BaseT multipoint tomultipoint interconnection through a SDH network by using over shared VCG (VC-Group) based on virtualconcatenation (VCAT).It is possible to configure 4 VMANs by COS1 class of traffic and 12 VMANs by COS0 class of traffic(2 classes of traffic are available on the GFP150 eXtra card).It is therefore possible to put until 16aggregation traffic (VMAN) on a VCG. In the GFP150 eXtra card we can have 64 (63 if the MSTP protectionis used) different VMAN maximum.In this case, each GFP150 eXtra card includes a switch function allowing Ethernet 10/100 BaseT multipointto multipoint interconnection

These services allow to answer, for example, to the following needs :

• point to point application: to build an Ethernet LAN between 2 sites

• multilink application (Star) : LAN interconnection between a central site and remote sites

• multipoint to multipoint application : to share a LAN between several sites in a BUS topology

Ethernet frames are transported on SDH by using the GFP-F protocol.

The use of the GFP protocol and the advanced Switch features allows to offer Quality of Services features(QoS). The QoS in GFP150 eXtra card is based on a traffic differentiation : metering, congestion control andscheduling.

Hardware design

8E/FE TX

To switchfabric

155 Mb/sSwitchSwitchGFP MapperGFP Mapper

Micro ProcessorMicro Processor

Figure 7-1: Hardware design of the card



7.2 - CONFIGURATION AND APPLICATIONS OF THE GFP150 EXTRA CARDS

7.2.1 - GFP150 eXtra card setup

a) Unwrap the card

b) Insert and screw the card in an allowed slot of the ADR2500 eXtra shelf.

c) Verify with HTTP configuration manager that the GFP150 eXtra pack (Upload/Download > Switchingmenu) is present in the system.

d) In the HTTP configuration manager, select GFP150 eXtra as expected card on the slot where it wasinserted

e) Connect the Ethernet cables to the GFP150 eXtra card

f) Wait a few seconds and check that the green LED “status” is steadily on.

7.2.2 - Create a LAN interconnection

7.2.2.1 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : “EPLine” service

In the diagram below, one intends to deport a full duplex LAN Ethernet 100 BaseT between 2 sites equipped ofADR2500 extra. In a first time, one supposes that the rate of the Ethernet traffic exchanged between the 2 sitesdoes not exceed 10Mbps. The QoS configuration is explained later in this document in greater details.

EEtthh//VVCC1122SSDDHH

EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000MM EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000MM

ADR2500 eXtraADR2500 eXtra

Figure 7-2 : EPLine service

7.2.2.1.1 - GFP150 eXtra cards configurationLogin on the first ADR2500 eXtra to open the “Shelfview” HTTP screen. On this screen, click on the GFP150eXtra card then on the “ETH” link.



Configuring the Ethernet interfaceClick on the “Interface Settings” link. By default the Ethernet interface is forced in 100Base T full duplex. Wechoose to keep the default configuration for this example.

Figure 7-3 : Configuring the Ethernet interface

Note : The Ethernet interface of the remote equipment (switch, IP router, PC, …) connected to the GFP150eXtra card MUST always be configured the same way. Due to possible interoperability issues with Auto-Negotiation between equipments from different origins, this feature (“Automatic” option) shouldpreferably not be used.

This screen is also used to set the severity associated to the interface defect of that interface.

Logical Interface

Select the UNI mode (User to Network Interface) : this type of interface corresponds to an interface customerwith one service per port. On these interfaces the provider OAM and BPDU MSTP management frames arefiltered : they are not sent to the customer network.The NNI untagged choice (Network to Network Interfacing) corresponds to a provider interface without providerVMAN tag (no VLAN aggregation).The NNI tagged choice (Network to Network Interfacing) corresponds to a provider interface on which aprovider VMAN tag is inserted in the outcoming frames and a provider VMAN tag is treated in the incomingframes.



Link Down Retransmit

The Link Down Retransmit function can only be used in point to point mode on a VMAN constituted of one ETHport and one VCG port in each equipment.

Tick "Enable" allows to report the state of the Ethernet Down or VCG Down link on the remote Ethernet link.

Pause Mode

The Pause function (IEEE 802.3 Flow control) can only be used in point to point mode/full duplex on a VMANconstituted of one UNI ETH port and one NNI untagged VCG port (or of two UNI and NNI untagged ETH ports).

If the "Status" field = Pause (result of autonegotiation or forcing)

- At reception of a pause frame on the ETH port, the transmission of Ethernet frames on the ETH port issuspended temporarily

- On detection of traffic obstruction on the VMAN considered in the sense ETH = > VCG, a pause frame istransmitted on the ETH port to ask the remote equipment to stop the transmission of Ethernet frametemporarily.

Warning : When the Pause mode is activated, be careful to configure the CIR and PIR to the maximum of thecapacity of the VCG

Configuring a VCG

Click on the “VCG” link, then on the “List” link. For the selected VCG#1 interface, click on VC#1 and then on the“Multiple Add Member” link. In the new screen coming up, select “VC12” as type and VC#6 as last connection.Click on “Apply” in order to create the virtually concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6) that will beused to transport Ethernet traffic.

GFP 150"LDREnable"

ETH Down Report

Status Down SDHVCG VCG

ETH ETH

Locs + VCG Down

VCG Down Report

VCG Down SDHVCG

VCG Down

GFP 150"LDREnable"

VCG

ETH

GFP 150"LDREnable"

GFP 150"LDREnable" ETH

1

23

4

1

2 23 3

ForcedCut off

Forced Cut off

ForcedCut off



Figure 7-4 : Configuring the VCG (1)

Click on the “Settings” link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration: “Admin Status” at “Up”,"Logical Interface NNI" at "untagged", “LCAS” at “Yes” and “FCS” at “No”. We choose to keep the defaultoptions for this example. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 (VC12) and the number of constitutingVC members (6).


Logical Interface NNI (Network to Network Interface) : untagged or tagged

- untagged : corresponds to a provider interface without provider VMAN tag (no VLAN aggregation).- tagged : corresponds to a provider interface on which a provider VMAN tag is inserted in the outcomingframes and a provider VMAN tag is treated in the incoming frames.



Click on the "VCG" link and then on the "Alarms " link. Select interface VCG#1 . Tick option "Monitor " and clickon "APPLY " in order to start monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-9).

Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Click on the “Switch” link, then on the “VMAN Create” link. Enter “2” as new VMAN ID and click on “Apply” inorder to add it. A new screen comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.Click on the “Add Port” link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, enter 10Mbpsfor the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority) (for more information on the notion ofpriority, see the chapter on the QoS). The CBS and EBS values are left to default. Then click on “Add” tocomplete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the “Add Port” link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, andenter 10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS valuesare left to default value. Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Figure 7-6 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch (1)

The association of these 2 ports to the same and unique VMAN ID isolates the Ethernet Switching betweenthese 2 ports from the rest of the ports (all the other Ethernet and VCG interfaces). Ethernet traffic forwardedbetween these 2 ports cannot leak out on other ports and vice versa.

Note : In order to install a point-to-point connection (EPLine service), there should never be more than 2 ports(1 customer UNI Ethernet port and 1 untagged NNI Ethernet or VCG port) in the same VMAN on theGFP150 eXtra card.

To double check the configuration click on the “VMAN List” link. A table displays what ports are associated witheach VMAN configured on the GFP150 eXtra card.




Configuring the SDH cross-connectsClick on the “Connection” tab of the shelf view and configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of theGFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote GFP150 eXtra card.

Figure 7-8 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects

Configuring the remote GFP150 eXtra cardJust do the configuration on the second ADR2500 eXtra following the exact same steps again.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connectionOnce both ADR2500 eXtra systems are configured, the ports used by the Point-to-Point can be activated oneach ADR2500 eXtra.

Click on the “ETH” link, then on the “Interface Settings” link. For interface ETH#1 , tick “ifAdminStatus up” andclick on “Apply”.

7.2.2.1.2 - Connectivity check

Perform the following verifications with both GFP150 eXtra cards:

1. Click on the "ETH" link, check that the Ethernet ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would bemarked yellow or red depending on alarm severity) ; then click on the "VCG" and "Alarms" links, check thatthe VCG ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would be marked yellow or red depending on alarmseverity). Otherwise click on the alarmed port to go to the proper screen, where the specific alarm isdisplayed (this brings you directly to step 2, 3 or 4 below). Repeat the operation for every alarmed port.

2. Click on the “ETH” link and select Ethernet interface ETH#1. Verify that the interface is running in 100BaseTfull duplex and that there is no alarm (the “Fault” option of the Interface Defect alarm is unchecked).Otherwise double-check both the cables and the configuration of the connected Ethernet interface.

3. Verify that there are no alarms on all the VC's being used. Otherwise double-check end-to-end SDHconfiguration as well as the signal quality over the various links.



4. Click on the “VCG” link then on the “Alarms” link, and select the VCG#1 interface. Once configuration iscomplete all alarms should disappear after a few seconds. Otherwise double-check the configuration in the“VCG” functional block on both ends as well as the configuration of the SDH cross-connects.

Figure 7-9 : Connectivity check

Note : This screen can be used to configure the severity of the alarms related to concatenated VC’s.

5. Click on the “Settings” link and verify that the VCG#1 is “Up”.

6. Try sending bi-directional Ethernet traffic across the end-to-end connection. You could for example:• Run a “ping” or a file transfer between 2 PC’s to control Ethernet connectivity.• Use an Ethernet traffic generator in order to further qualify the end-to-end connection.

As a final step, double-check compliance of the GFP150 eXtra counters on both ends based on the trafficbeing forwarded. Namely the following counters:- Ethernet counters: click on the “ETH” link and then on the “MIB2 Counters” link- GFP counters: click on the “VCG” link and then on the “MIB2/GFP Counters” link- SLA compliance counters: click on the “Switch” link. Select VMAN ID “2”, click on the “VMAN SLA

counters” link. Verify the set of counters for interfaces ETH#1 and VCG#1. These counters aredescribed later in this document in greater details.

7.2.2.2 - Point-to-Point mode interconnection : “EVPLine” service (aggregation)

In the diagram below, one intends to deport two full duplex LAN Ethernet 100 BaseT between 2 sites equippedof ADR2500 extra by sharing the same VCG for the two traffics (aggregation), this in order to optimize the SDHbandwidth.

One supposes that the Ethernet traffic rate exchanged between the 2 sites does not exceed 10Mbps for eachflow.



EEtthh//VVCC1122SSDDHH

EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000MM EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000MM

ADR2500 eXtraADR2500 eXtra

1 VCG

Figure 7-10 : Service EVPLine

7.2.2.2.1 - GFP150 eXtra cards configuration

Configuration of the Ethernet interfaceClick on the "ETH" link then on the “Interface Settings” link. By default the Ethernet interface is forced in100Base T full duplex. Apply the same configuration for all Ethernet ports.

Configuring a VCGClick on the “VCG” link, then on the “List” link. For the VCG#1 interface, select the VC#1 and click on the“Multiple Add Member” link. In the new window, select “VC12” as type and the VC#12 as last connection. Clickon “Apply” in order to create the virtually concatenated group of 12 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#12) that will beused to transport Ethernet traffic.




Click on the “Settings” link to configure VCG#1 as following : “Admin Status” at “Up”, "Logical Interface NNI" at"tagged", “LCAS” at “Yes” and “FCS” at “No”. These options correspond to the needed example for theaggregation, on the VCG1 the frames must be taggedThis screen also displays the type of VCG#1 (VC12) and the number of constituting VC members (12).


Click on the "Alarms " link. Select the interface VCG#1 . Tick "Monitor " option and click on "APPLY " in order tostart monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-9).


For the first ETH port (ETH1):Click on the “Switch” link, then on the “VMAN Create” link. Enter “2” as new VMAN ID and click on “Apply” inorder to add it. A new window comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the “Add Port” link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, enter 10Mbpsfor the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority) (for more information on the notion ofpriority, see the chapter on the QoS). The CBS and EBS values are left to default values. Then click on “Add” tocomplete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the “Add Port” link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, enter10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority ". The CBS and EBS values are left to default values.Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Then for the other Eth port (ETH2):Click on the “Switch” link, then on the “VMAN Create” link. Enter “3” as new VMAN ID and click on “Apply” inorder to add it. A new window comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the “Add Port” link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#2, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, enter 10Mbpsfor the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority) (for more oinformation on the notion ofpriority, see the chapter on the QoS). The CBS and EBS values are left to default values. Then click on “Add” tocomplete the addition of this port to VMAN 3

Click on the “Add Port” link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, enter10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority ". The CBS and EBS values are left to default values.Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 3.



The association of these 2 ports to the same and unique VMAN ID isolates the Ethernet Switching betweenthese 2 ports from the rest of the ports (all the other Ethernet and VCG interfaces). Ethernet traffic forwardedbetween these 2 ports cannot leak out on other ports and vice versa.With the selection of tagged mode for the VCG1, it is possible to differentiate traffics of the two Eth links on theVCG.

Note : In order to install a point-to-point connection (EVPLine service), there should never be more than 2ports (1 customer UNI Ethernet port and 1 tagged NNI Ethernet or VCG port) in the same VMAN on theGFP150 eXtra card.

To check the configuration click on the “VMAN List” link. A table displays the associated ports to eachconfigured VMAN on the GFP150 eXtra card.

Figure 7-13 : Configuring the Ethernet Switch

Configuring the SDH cross-connectsClick on the “Connection” tab of the shelf view and configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#12 of theGFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote GFP150 eXtra card.

Figure 7-14 : Configuring the SDH Cross Connects



Configuring the remote GFP150 eXtra cardJust do the configuration on the second ADR2500 eXtra by following the exact same steps again.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connectionOnce both ADR2500 eXtra systems are configured, the ports used by the point-to-point links can be activatedon each ADR2500 eXtra.

Click on the “ETH” link, then on the “Interface Settings” link. For ETH#1 and ETH#2 interfaces, tick“ifAdminStatus up” and click on “Apply”.

7.2.2.2.2 - Control of the linkTake again the procedure of the paragraph 7.2.2.1.2 - to do controls, by verifying the 2 links.

7.2.2.3 - “Hub and Spoke” interconnection: “EPLAN” service

In the network below, we show interconnection of three remote sites with one central site in a “hub and spoke”topology. Although Ethernet interfaces are 100BaseT full duplex, the load of traffic between the remote sitesand the central site is as follows:

• remote sites 1 and 2 : 10Mbps (6VC12),

• remote site 3 : 5Mbps (3VC12).

The sum of the data rates going to the central site is 25Mbps. However we consider in this example that thetotal rate of traffic going in the opposite direction (a.k.a. from the central site to the remote sites) doesn’t go over20Mbps ; this is just for the purpose of the example.

In this example, the central site acts as a full bridge : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between remote sites.

If no traffic must be allowed between remote sites (for security purpose for instance), one should use 3 separateEthernet interfaces on the central site, and 1 point to point connection between each remote site and the centralsite. In this case configure 3 independent point-to-point connections as described in the previous section.

EEtthh // 66xxVVCC1122

Central site

Remote site 1


EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000



SSDDHH



Remote site 2

Remote site 3

Figure 7-15 : EPLAN service



7.2.2.3.1 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra card of the central site

Login on the ADR2500 eXtra of the central site to open the “Shelfview” HTTP screen. On this screen, click onthe GFP150 eXtra card then on the “ETH” link.

Configuring the Ethernet interfaceClick on the “Interface Settings” link. By default the Ethernet interface is forced in 100Base T full duplex. Wechoose to keep the default configuration for this example.

Note : The Ethernet interface of the remote equipment (switch, IP router, PC, …) connected to the GFP150eXtra card MUST always be configured the same way. Due to possible interoperability issues with Auto-Negotiation between equipments from different origins, this feature (“Automatic” option) shouldpreferably not be used.

Figure 7-16 : Configuring the Ethernet interface

Configuring the VCGs

Click on the “VCG” link and then on the “List” link. For the selected VCG#1 interface, click on VC#1 and then onthe “Multiple Add Member” link. In the new screen coming up, select “VC12” as type and VC#6 as lastconnection. Click on “Apply” in order to create the virtually concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6)that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic.

Select interface VCG#2 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 6 VC12 (VC12#7 to VC12#12) ; ifthe request is refused, verify that the VCG#2 is configured to Down in the "VCG > Settings" window.

Select interface VCG#3 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 3 VC12 (VC12#13 to VC12#15).




Click on the “Settings” link. Verify that VCG#1, VCG#2 and VCG#3 are set with default configuration: “AdminStatus” at “Up”, "Logical Interface NNI" at "untagged", “LCAS” at “Yes” and “FCS” at “No”. We choose to keepthe default options for this example. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1,#2,#3 (VC12) and the numberof constituting VC members (6,6,3).




Click on the "Alarms" link. Select interface VCG#1. Tick option "Monitor " and click on "APPLY " in order to startmonitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-9). Repeat with VCG#2 and VCG#3.

Configuring the Ethernet SwitchClick on the “Switch” link and then on the “VMAN Create” link. Enter “2” as new VMAN ID and click on “Apply” inorder to add it. A new screen comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.Click on the “Add Port” link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, and enter20Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values are leftto default. Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the “Add Port” link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, andenter 10Mbps for the CIR, and PIR and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS valuesare left to default. Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the “Add Port” link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#2, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, andenter 10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS valuesare left to default. Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.

Click on the “Add Port” link again. Select the Ethernet interface VCG#3, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, andenter 5Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values areleft to default. Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.






Configuring the SDH cross-connects Click on the “Connection” tab. Configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of the GFP150 eXtra card asusual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 1.

Configure the connections from VC12#7 to VC12#12 of the GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 2.

Configure the connections from VC12#13 to VC12#15 of the GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between the central site and remote site 3.

7.2.2.3.2 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra cards of the remote sites

The GFP150 eXtra cards of the remote sites must be configured as if they were in point-to-point mode. Hence,we apply the configuration described in the point-to-point section of this document (§ 7.2.2.1 -). However thepolicing rates (10Mbps or 5Mbps) and the right number of VC12 (6 or 3) must be configured appropriately foreach remote site 1, 2 and 3 (see Figure 7-15). See the topology figure of this example.

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connectionsOnce both GFP150 eXtra cards at the ends of a connection are configured, the Ethernet interfaces should beactivated.

Click on the “ETH” link and then on the “Interface Settings” link. For interface ETH#1 , tick “ifAdminStatus up”and click on “Apply”.


For each GFP150 eXtra card, perform the following verifications:

1. Click on the "ETH" link, check that the Ethernet ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would bemarked yellow or red depending on alarm severity) ; then click on the "VCG" link and on the "Alarms" link,check that the VCG ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would be marked yellow or reddepending on alarm severity). Otherwise click on the alarmed port to go to the proper screen, where thespecific alarm is displayed (this brings you directly to step 2, 3 or 4 below). Repeat the operation for everyalarmed port.


3. Verify that there are no alarms on all the VC’s being used. Otherwise double-check end-to-end SDHconfiguration as well as the signal quality over the various links.

4. Click on the “VCG” link and on the “Alarms” link, then select the VCG#1, VCG#2 and VCG#3 on the centralsite and only VCG#1 on a remote site. Once configuration is complete all alarms should disappear after afew seconds. Otherwise double-check the configuration in the “VCG” functional block on both ends as wellas the configuration of the SDH cross-connects.

5. Click on the “Settings” link and verify that the VCG is “Up”.

6. Try sending bi-directional Ethernet traffic over each point-to-point connection. You could for example:• Run a “ping” or a file transfer between 2 PC’s to control Ethernet connectivity.• Use an Ethernet traffic generator in order to further qualify the end-to-end connection.

As a final step, double-check compliance of the GFP150 eXtra counters on both ends based on the trafficbeing forwarded.



7.2.2.4 - Bus interconnection : service “EPLAN”

In the network below, we setup an Ethernet 100BaseT LAN spanning over 4 sites connected to an ADR2500eXtra.

In this example, sites 2 and 4 play the role of a full bridge: : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between allremote sites based on MAC address learning.

Each inter-site link of the bus topology is configured to transport a load of 10Mbps (6 VC12). Similarly, on eachADR2500 eXtra the Ethernet interface connected to the bus is policed at 10Mbps.

SSDDHH


EEtthh // 44xxVVCC1122EEtthh // 44xxVVCC1122


EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000

Site n°3Site n°1

Site n°4Site n°2

Figure 7-21 : EPLAN Service - "bus" mode

7.2.2.4.1 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra cards of sites 1 and 3

The GFP150 eXtra cards of sites 1 and 3 must be configured in point-to-point mode following configurationguidelines of the point-to-point section of this document (§ 7.2.2.1 -).

7.2.2.4.2 - Configuring the GFP150 eXtra cards of sites 2 and 4

For sites 2 and 4, the configuration of functional blocks VCG, Connection and Ethernet Switch is different fromthe two other sites.



Configuring the VCGs

Click on the “VCG” link and then on the “List” link. For the selected VCG#1 interface, click on VC#1 and then onthe “Multiple Add Member” link. In the new screen coming up, select “VC12” as type and VC#6 as lastconnection. Click on “Apply” in order to create the virtually concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6)that will be used to transport Ethernet traffic.

Select interface VCG#2 and redo the same operation to add a new group of 6 VC12 (VC12#7 to VC12#12).


Click on the “Settings” link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration: “Admin Status” at “Up”,"Logical Interface NNI" at "untagged", “LCAS” at “Yes” and “FCS” at “No”. We choose to keep the defaultoptions for this example. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 and VCG#2 (VC12) and the number ofconstituting VC members (6).




Click on the "Alarms " link. Select interface VCG#1 . Tick option "Monitor " and click on "APPLY " in order tostart monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-9). Repeat with VCG#2.


Click on the “Switch” link and then on the “VMAN Create” link. Enter “2” as new VMAN ID and click on “Apply” inorder to add it. A new screen comes up in order to associate ports to this VMAN.

Click on the “Add Port” link. Select the Ethernet interface ETH#1, the “trTCM” policing algorithm, and enter10Mbps for the CIR and PIR, and 7 for the "User Priority " (maximun priority). The CBS and EBS values are leftto default. Then click on “Add” to complete the addition of this port to VMAN 2.








Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the “Connection” tap. Configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of the GFP150 eXtra card asusual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between each middle site (2 or 4) and each edge site(respectively 1 or 3, see Figure 7-21).

Configure the connections from VC12#7 to VC12#12 of the GFP150 eXtra card as usual in order to have end-to-end SDH connectivity between both middle sites (2 and 4).

Activating the end-to-end Ethernet connectionsOnce both GFP150 eXtra cards at the ends of a connection are configured, the Ethernet and VCG interfacesshould be activated.

Click on the “ETH” link and then on the “Interface Settings” link. For interface ETH#1 , tick “ifAdminStatus up”and click on “Apply”.


For each GFP150 eXtra card, perform the following verifications:

1. Click on the "ETH" link, check that the Ethernet ports in use are not highlighted (the given box would bemarked yellow or red depending on alarm severity) ; then click on the "VCG" link, check that the VCG portsin use are not highlighted (the given box would be marked yellow or red depending on alarm severity).Otherwise click on the alarmed port to go to the proper screen, where the specific alarm is displayed (thisbrings you directly to step 2, 3 or 4 below). Repeat the operation for every alarmed port.


3. Verify that there are no alarms on all the VC’s being used. Otherwise double-check end-to-end SDHconfiguration as well as the signal quality over the various links.

4. Click on the “VCG” link and on the “Alarms” link, then select the VCG#1, VCG#2 and VCG#3 on the centralsite and only VCG#1 on a remote site. Once configuration is complete all alarms should disappear after afew seconds. Otherwise double-check the configuration in the “VCG” functional block on both ends as wellas the configuration of the SDH cross-connects.

5. Click on the “Settings” link and verify that the VCG is “Up”.

6. Try sending bi-directional Ethernet traffic over each point-to-point connection. You could for example:• Run a “ping” or a file transfer between 2 PC’s to control Ethernet connectivity.• Use an Ethernet traffic generator in order to further qualify the end-to-end connection.

As a final step, double-check compliance of the GFP150 eXtra counters on both ends based on the trafficbeing forwarded.



7.2.2.5 - “ Bus interconnection : service “EVPLAN”

In the network below, we setup two Ethernet 100BaseT LAN spanning over 4 sites connected to an ADR2500eXtra.

To the difference of the EPLAN service, the two LAN use the same VCG to circulate, it is possible with theaggregation in the same VCG. For this the VCG ports of the N°1, N°2, N°3 and N°4 equipment must beconfigured in fashion NNI tagged.

In this example, 2 and 4 sites play the role of a full bridge: : Ethernet frames can be forwarded between allremote sites based on MAC address learning.

Each inter-site link of the bus topology is configured to transport a load of 20Mbps (12 VC12). Similarly, on eachADR2500 eXtra, the Ethernet interface connected to the bus is policed at 10Mbps.

SSDDHH

EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000 EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000



Site n°3Site n°1

Site n°4Site n°2

Eth/12xVC12 Eth/12xVC12

Figure 7-26 : EVPLAN Service - "bus" mode



7.2.3 - Implementation of the OAM-CC function (Operation AdministrationMaintenance - Continuity Check) on the GFP150 eXtra card

The OAM function (Operation Administration Maintenance) in the GFP card, is used to supervise the customertraffic. This function consists in the broadcast and receipt of specific messages to supervise customer traffic. Thisallows to know the state of the network, in relation to the progress of this fluxIt is based on the IEEE-802. 1ag] norm . The supervision frames for broadcast and receipt are named framesCC : Continuity Check.

Below an example of utilization of the OAM function:

Probe Source OAM-CC

Probe Sink OAM-CC

Figure 7-27 : Example of OAM utilization

The OAM-CC function is constituted of source and sink probes:

• A source probe that transmits a multicast frame periodically (by default 10 seconds in the extra) towardsink probes. A probe source can transmits toward several sink probes.

• A sink probe that treats the multicast frame, and a time-out (by default 10 secondes in the eXtra).

In the example of the figure N°1, a source probe is declared in the equipment N°1 and a sink probe in theequipment N°2 on the same VMANi, that allows the monitoring of the VMANi customer traffic betweenequipment N°1 and equipment N°2 in one sense

To supervise the other sense of this VMANi it is necessary to add two supplementary probes, a source probe onthe equipment N°2 and a sink probe on the equipment N°1.

The OMA-CC function manages 2 supervision alarms :• OAM Degraded : in this case it is the loss of one up to three consecutive CC frames• OAM Defect : in this case it is the loss of at least four consecutive CC frames.

The period between two OAM frames is configurable : 10s by default.

The number of source probes is limited to 10 and the number of sink probes to 64 by GFP150 eXtra card.

The frame multicast OAM is not distributed on the UNI port (customer), and is distributed tagged on tagged NNIport and no tagged on untagged NNI port

The OAM CC multicast MAC address is by default: 01-80-C2-00-00-67.

NNINNI

UNICE

CE

UNISDH Network

ADR2500 eXtra N°1 ADR2500 eXtra N° 2VMANi



Notes :- The periodic OAM defect, can mean that network capacity for the VCG are not adjusted, and that congestionsappear (example : a VC link loss in a VCG with LCAS).- No OAM probe must be activated on a flow created between a GFP150 eXtra card and a 4E/FE card. Theprovider OAMcc frames are not filtered by the 4E/FE card and are forwarded to the customer network.

7.2.4 - Using Quality of Service features of GFP150 eXtra card

7.2.4.1 - QoS functions of the GFP150 eXtra card

The GFP150 eXtra card provides various QoS functions. These functions format outgoing traffic flows on allinterfaces. Namely:

Traffic is forwarded in compliance with a pre-configured “Service Level Agreement” (SLA) Committed and peak rates are guaranteed for every traffic flow

The QoS functions implemented on the GFP150 eXtra card are:

• definition of guaranteed rate contracts per traffic flow

• congestion management of traffic flows in agreement with their conformity to contracts

Functional diagram

The GFP150 eXtra QoS can be represented by the following diagram. It includes:• a block of metering and policing,• two waiting queues, one file (TC0) in Low priority and one queue (TC1) in SP (Strict Priority)• a scheduler mechanism for outgoing theses packets of theses queues toward the exit port.

The goal of this mechanism is to encourage an important customer by report on a lower customer in aggregatetraffic to respect times of latency associated to every class of service.

The egress treatment (side port broadcast) permits a differentiated treatment according to the priority of theVMAN with these different queues of transmission (TC: Traffic Class) as well as the means of outgoing (scheduling in priority the TC1 SP (Strict Priority) file untill its shaping is reached).

This diagram applies to all ports: the 8 Ethernet interfaces plus the 8 Ethernet over SDH interfaces. All functionsare configured separately per port.

FromEthernet

Toward SDHswitch fabric

VC3-nV or VC12-nV

Metering Policing

File TC 0GREEN

YELLOW

RED

GREEN

YELLOW

Compteurs SLA

File TC 1

SCHEDULER

SP

LP

%Shaping

Ingress Egress

Figure 7-28 : QoS architecture



QoS management - Rate control

Rate control compares the temporal characteristics of received traffic (based on the rate and length of bursts)with a contract subscribed by the customer sending this traffic. This type of contract is commonly called a“Service Level Agreement” (SLA).

In the first stage, the temporal characteristics of the actual traffic flow are measured (“metering”). By comparingthem to the configured profile (or contract), each frame is colored according to the following rule:• Green: the frame is “in profile”• Yellow: the frame is “partially out of profile”• Red: the frame is “entirely out of profile”

The GFP150 eXtra card provides counters displaying the number of frames associated with each color.

In a second stage, all frames run through the policing function and all Red frames are dropped. Only Green andYellow frames can progress.

Metering of the GFP150 eXtra card is based on two IETF standards that can be selected via configuration:• “Single Rate Three Color Marker” (srTCM) per the IETF RFC 2697• “Two Rate Three Color Marker” (trTCM) per the IETF RFC 2698

When an interface is added to a VMAN, a traffic profile must be configured to be used with traffic entering thatinterface. In the current version of the GFP150 eXtra card, an interface can be associated to only one VMAN,hence only one profile.

Traffic profilesTraffic profiles use the following parameters on the GFP150 eXtra card:

Parameter Description Unit srTCM trTCMCIR Committed Information Rate Mbps YES YESPIR Peak Information Rate Mbps NO YESEBS Excess Burst Size KB YES YESCBS Committed Burst Size KB YES YES

Figure 7-29 : Traffic profile

The QoS parameters strictly apply to the Ethernet traffic. The overhead generated by GFP encapsulation is notaccounted for in these rates.

srTCM (single rate Three Color Marker) :

A srTCM meter is useful for policing of a service where only the length and not the peak rate of the burstdetermine its eligibility. Metering is based on a Committed Information Rate (CIR) and two associated burstsizes, a Committed Burst Size (CBS) and an Excess Burst Size (EBS). A packet is set compliant or green if itsrate is less or equal to the CIR or if its excess rate does not exceed the CBS. It is set partially compliant oryellow if its excess rate does exceed the CBS but not the EBS. It is set non compliant or red otherwise.

trTCM (two rate Three Color Marker) :

A trTCM meter is useful for policing of a service where a peak rate needs to be enforced separately from acommitted rate. Metering is based on two rates, Peak Information Rate (PIR) and Committed Information Rate(CIR) and their associated burst sizes, Excess Burst Size (EBS) and Committed Burst Size (CBS). A packet isset non compliant or red if its rate exceeds the PIR and its excess rate exceeds the EBS. A packet is setcompliant or green if its rate is less or equal to the CIR or if its excess rate does not exceed the CBS. Otherwiseit is set partially compliant or yellow.



Congestion avoidance and buffer management

The GFP150 eXtra card uses a standard algorithm to control the distribution of resources between classes ofservice LP (Low Priority) and SP (Strict Priority) in order to manage congestion phases.

The QOS configuration in the GFP150 extra holds account of the priority information affected to everyaggregate customer. The priority affectation to a customer is done according to a SLA (service levelagreement), via the field configuration "User Priority" (between 0 and 7). To a priority data (configured in UNIand NNI untagged ports or extracted from VMAN tags in NNI tagged ports) corresponds a traffic class :• User Priority 0,1,2,3,4,5 => TC0 (Low Priority)• User Priority 6,7 => TC1 (Strict Priority)

In the current version of GFP150 eXtra card, congestion can happen on transmission on an Ethernet or anEthernet over SDH interface under the following two (non exclusive) circumstances:• In a point-to-multipoint topology, when traffic coming from several ports must be mixed for transmission over

another port of the GFP150 eXtra. There can be more or less transitory phases where the sum of incomingtraffic is significantly greater than the bandwidth available on the outbound port. Point-to-multipointtopologies especially subject to this type of congestion are those involving an Ethernet port configured at10Mbps or an Ethernet over SDH port configured with a small number of VC’s.

• Regardless of the actual topology, when a large quantity of traffic goes through the policing stage but withthe Yellow color (only partially compliant traffic). There can be more or less transitory phases where theexcess rate is actually too high to be transmitted fast enough over the outbound port. Traffic profilesespecially subject to this type of congestion are those with a large differential between the configured CIRand PIR.

Some repetitive or lasting congestion problems generally require an evolution of the topology network.

7.2.4.2 - Configuring the QoS features

Configuring Metering and Policing, Classification

Examples above with Point-to-Point, Hub-and-Spoke and Bus topologies already describe the configuration of atraffic profile when adding a new port to a VMAN (see “Configuring the Ethernet Switch” for each example).

Instructions are different to configure a traffic profile on ports already associated with a VMAN. Click on the“Switch” link and on the “VMAN List” link. Then three commands are available:

• “Add Port”: use this link to add a new port in a VMAN with a traffic profile• “Delete Port”: use this link to remove a port from a VMAN and remove the associated traffic profile• “Modify Port”: use this link to change the traffic profile associated with a VMAN configured on a port

The following screen shows the configuration of a “srTCM” traffic profile on an Ethernet port.



Figure 7-30 : Configuring a srTCM profile

The following screen shows the configuration of a “trTCM” traffic profile on an Ethernet port.

Figure 7-31 : Configuring a trTCM profile

User Priority

The priority affectation to a customer (VMAN) is done via the "User Priority" field configuration (between 0 and7). The values 6 and 7 are the most important values because they use the SP.

Parameters regulating for Classes of Service

The GFP150 eXtra card rules the reserved bandwidth for the SP queue (SP Bandwidth%). To read thesesinformations, click on the " Global Params " link then on the " Classes of service " link ; the following screen isthen displayed:



Figure 7-32 : Reading Traffic Classes parameters

If the operator wants to modify one of these parameters he must disactivate the calculation mode automatic.For this, click on the "Global Params " link then on the "Advanced " link, select the wanted port for the modechange, then pass from ON to OFF the column parameter " Auto ", then one can modify the SP bandwidth.

Figure 7-33 : Regulating Traffic Classes SP parameters



SP Bandwidth % (1-100%) — Translation in percentage of configured bandwidth for Strict Priority waitingqueue.This queue encourages flux latency times that are affected to it, but with a limited queue shaping in order tokeep bandwidth for low priority queue.

Reading the SLA countersThe GFP150 eXtra card provides counters with the quantity of compliant (green), partially compliant (yellow)and non-compliant (red) traffic received on a specific interface for a specific VMAN. Click on the “Switch” linkand on the “VMAN List” link. Select the row of the VMAN, click on the “VMAN SLA Counters” link. Then select aport.

Figure 7-34 : SLA compliance counters

The GFP150 eXtra card also offers supplementary counters by port and VMAN.To read these counters, click onthe "Switch " link then on the "VMANPortCounters " link. In the top window, select the ETH and VCG ports onwhich one wants these counters. The number is limited to 2.In the below window, select the wanted port for the visualization.

Figure 7-35 : VMAN Port counters



7.2.5 - Using the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150 eXtracard

7.2.5.1 - Description of the Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol on the GFP150 eXtra card

The GFP150 eXtra card enables activation of the "Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol " (MSTP), standard Ethernetprotocol defined in IEEE 802.1S.

MSTP can remove loops in an Ethernet network setup with redundant links. Without MSTP, these loops areforbidden by the Ethernet standard to avoid a "broadcast storm ". With a loop and no MSTP, all broadcastframes or unicast frames with an unknown address are endlessly replicated on all the links to the point wherethe whole bandwidth is consumed.

In simple topologies such as point-to-point, hub-and-spoke or bus, MSTP is not necessary.

However, in ring or meshed topologies, MSTP is recommended since the network contains Ethernet loops.

Notes :- A SDH loop to activate SDH protection mechanisms does not imply a loop at the Ethernet level. Ethernet linksare terminated by Ethernet ports or Ethernet over SDH ports.- No MSTP must be activated on a flow created between a GFP150 eXtra card and a 4E/FE card. The providerBPDU MSTP frames are not filtered by the 4E/FE card and are forwarded to the customer network.

On the GFP150 eXtra card, MSTP can be turned ON/OFF at a global level first. Then, once globally activated,each port Ethernet or Ethernet over SDH can be included or not in the Spanning Tree. Once a port is configuredwith MSTP, the protocol controls transmission over this port. Namely, MSTP can block transmission on the portmomentarily or until MSTP converges again following a link loss on an Ethernet port.

The MSTP protocol on the GFP150 eXtra card permanently exchanges control packets called "BPDUs " with allother GFP150 eXtra cards running MSTP in the network. These packets are only forwarded on links included inthe Spanning Tree by configuration.

Note : In the present configuration, only the VMAN of which the identifying is between 4032 and 4094 can useMSTP. Therefore, MSTP can only be used on 63 VMANS.

Warning :- The VMAN ID of an activated VMAN cannot be modified ; this VMAN must be formerly suppressed.- The aggregation of a VMAN using MSTP (VMAN ID from 4032 to 4094) with a VMAN without MSTP (VMANID from 2 to 4031) can broke the traffic associated to the VMAN without MSTP because this last is automaticallyin the CIST.

CIST and MSTI definitionCIST (Common Instance Spanning Tree) manages a region, when more than 63 instances are used.MSTI (Multi Spanning Tree Instance) manages a VLAN.CIST and MSTI are independent .Each MSTI is independent of other one. Each MSTI corresponds to one and only one VLAN.

Port MSTP stateOnce a port is included in the Spanning Tree, MSTP compute the state of the port based both on theinformation of the BPDUs received from the network as well as the transitions of the operational state of anylocal port (in case of link loss/recovery for example).

Each MSTP port is managed by two different informations “PORT STATE” and “PORT ROLE”.PORT STATE can be:• "DISABLED " : The port is not included in the MSTP Protocol. This happens when the physical port is

disconnected or when MSTP is deactivated by configuration on that port.• "FORWARDING " : The port id included in the MSTP Protocol and is connected.



PORT ROLE can be:• "DISCARDING " : The MSTP protocol decided to block transmission on the port to avoid an Ethernet loop.

Once a port in this state, it cannot receive or transmit any kind of Ethernet frame, except for MSTP BPDUsthat it continues to manage.

• "BACKUP " : The MSTP protocol decided to block transmission on the port to avoid an Ethernet loop. Thisstate indicates the bridge has received its owner frame.

• "LEARNING " : The port is going to transit to "DISCARDING " or "FORWARDING " state depending on theresult of MSTP convergence. No other Ethernet frame than BPDUs are received or transmitted on that portin this state. However, in this state, MAC address learning starts for frames received on that port.

• "DESIGNATED " : The port is completely functional. The port transmits data and learning @MAC.• "ROOT " : The port is completely functional. The port transmits data and learning @MAC. The root port is

the shortest way to the ROOT BRIDGE.

The following example displays a network with an Ethernet loop annihilated by MSTP. It shows the principle ofconvergence towards a Tree topology ("Multiple Spanning Tree ") with a node elected as root of the tree ("RootBridge ").

Figure 7-36 : MSTP port types

2

1

Bridge Z(Root)

1

2

3

4

Bridge B

1

2

3

Bridge A

1

Bridge D

1

Bridge C

1

Bridge E

Blocking

DesignatedPort

DesignatedPort

Root Ports

DesignatedPorts

Root Ports

Root Port

DesignatedPorts

Forwarding frames between Root ports and Designated ports



Controlling MSTP convergenceA specific MSTP cost can be configured on every port (port priority), and on every Bridge (Bridge priority) inorder to control the Tree topology of the network during stable phases. At times where there is no link loss onany port, either Ethernet or Ethernet over SDH. Naturally, redundant links blocked by MSTP during stablephases can be unblocked when a link is lost in the network. Later, when the link failure is fixed and the primarylink comes back up, MSTP re-converges towards the stable topology and blocks back the redundant links.

Transparency of MSTP on the GFP150 eXtraPer IEEE 802.1D standard, MSTP BPDUs must be sent with a reserved multicast address as MAC destination :01-80-C2-00-00-00 ("Bridge Group Address "). "). By default, the GFP150 eXtra card uses the address : 01-80-C2-00-00-08.

However, the MSTP implementation on the GFP150 eXtra card supports configuration of a different multicastaddress (standard : 01-80-C2-00-00-00 or non standard : inside the range 01-80-C2-00-00-04 to 01-80-C2-00-00-0F) for use by the protocol. Using a different address does not change the MSTP algorithm at all. It is just away to distinguish the BPDUs sent by the GFP150 eXtra card from BPDUs sent by any other Ethernet bridge(which would logically use the standard address).

The GFP150 eXtra cards are useful to interconnect client Ethernet LANs across a network provider’s backbone(Ethernet over SDH). There can be cases where the clients themselves would be running STP between theirremote sites. By using a non standard address only known by the ADR2500 eXtra, the GFP150 eXtra card cantransport BPDUs coming from client networks in a totally transparent manner.

This way, the STP protocol in the operator network is completely isolated from any MSTP instances running inthe client networks. Moreover, the ADR2500 eXtra ensures continuity of clients’ STP across remote client sites.

Note : It is recommended not to activate MSTP on the Ethernet ports unless otherwise required by thetopology. It is generally useless to activate the operator MSTP on ports connected to client networks.

7.2.5.2 - MSTP Licence Activation on a GFP150 eXtra card

The MSTP utilization by the GFP150 eXtra card is submitted to a Licence. To activate this Licence, proceed asfollowing :

1) note the GFP150 eXtra MAC address on which the MSTP Licence must be activated

2) provide these informations to the Hotline via phone or E-MAIL to get the Licence key

3) enter the MSTP Licence key (32 characters) provided by the Hotline, via the "MSTP > Licence Activation"

menu, then click on Apply.

Figure 7-37 : MSTP Licence Activation



Nota :

An alarm "No MSTP Licence" of card level is activated if at least one port has a MSTP configuration to ON andif the MSTP licence is not activated.The severity of this alarm is major and no configurable.

7.2.5.3 - Example of MSTP configuration

Use the previous example with a bus topology. Just a redundant link between the remote ADR2500 eXtra 1 and3 is added. The final topology works like a ring.

First the 4 ADR2500 eXtra should be configured according to the instructions of the bus topology section of thisdocument (*). Then, the three steps below should be followed in order :

1. Configure the redundant link (*).2. Activate MSTP on all ports of the bus (as well as on the redundant link)3. Turn ON the redundant link

Once the link is activated, one should see that MSTP puts each end of the redundant link in the"DISCARDING " state. All other ports of the bus go in "FORWARDING " or “ROOT” state.

(*) Warning : the used VMAN for MSTP should have a VMAM ID between 4032 and 4094 ; it will be 4032 forthis example.

SSDDHH


EEtthh // 44xxVVCC1122EEtthh // 44xxVVCC1122

Site n°1


EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000EEtthheerrnneett 1100//110000

Site n°3

Site n°2 Site n°4

Figure 7-38 : Example of MSTP configuration



Bus configuration

See the bus section in this document. (§ 7.2.2.4 -)

Configuring the redundant link between the ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3

Configure the VCG#2 port on ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3 with the same instructions as for VCG#2 betweenADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4.

In the end, ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3 must be connected via VCG#2 configured with 6 VC12 and included in thesame VMAN as all other ports (VMAN ID "4032").

Note : The link is not activated yet in order to avoid creating an Ethernet loop in the network before MSTP isrunning.

Activating MSTP on ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4

Click on the "MSTP" link then on the "Bridge settings " link of the GFP150 eXtra card. Set the "MSTP Procotol "parameter at the "MSTP " value and click on "Apply ".

Figure 7-39 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (1)

The default values of fields of the Bridge Configuration screen are those of the 802.1d norm ; to optimize thetimes of convergence of the MSTP protocol, it is necessary to adjust the parameters "Forward Delay","Hello Time" and "Max Age".

The other parameters allow to configure MSTP according to the user's , Before modify these fields, read the802.1s standard.



Click on the "Port Settings " link. Set ports VCG#1 and VCG#2 at the "Enable " value and leave other field atdefault value, then click on "Apply ".

Figure 7-40 : Activating MSTP on the ADR2500 eXtra 2 and 4 (2)

Activating MSTP on ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3

To activate MSTP on cards n°1 and n°3, repeat previous step.

Activating the redundant link

On ADR2500 eXtra 1 and 3, we turn ON the VCG#2 interfaces :Click on the “VCG” link of the GFP150 eXtra and then on the “Settings” link. Set the “Admin Status” of interfaceVCG#2 to “Up” and click on “Apply”.

Once the two interfaces are activated, MSTP starts exchanging BPDUs across the new link and a new state iscalculated. However, after a few seconds each port of this link goes in "BLOCKING " state thanks to thedifference in "Path Cost " over the ring. Except for MSTP BPDUs, no Ethernet frame is forwarded over this link.

Connectivity check

It is possible to check a MSTI state on a GFP150 card.

Click on the "MSTP" link then on the "MSTI List" link.



Figure 7-41 : MSTI Checking (1)

Select MSTI Id 1and click on the “MSTI-Port Informations and Settings” link to see the next panel.

All selected MSTI port state can be verified.

Figure 7-42 : MSTI Checking (2)



7.2.6 - Using LCAS on the GFP150 eXtra card

7.2.6.1 - Description of LCAS

The GFP150 eXtra card enables activation of the standard protocol "Link Capacity Adjustment System" (LCAS)independently on each of the 8 VCGs.

LCAS is useful to :• Dynamically add or remove VC members from a VCG without deactivating the VCG (making it a hitless

operation for traffic)• Dynamically adjust the available bandwidth when alarms are triggered ON/OFF on the VC members of a

VCG. The bandwidth of every VC under failure is subtracted from the VCG bandwidth. Hence, in case offailures the VCG continues to forward traffic as long as there is still at least one operational VC.

Without LCAS :• The GFP150 eXtra card requires deactivation of a VCG before VC members can be added or removed (it

forces a traffic interruption)• A VCG becomes completely broken as soon as an alarm is triggered on at least one VC member. Plus, it

becomes operational again only once no VC is under failure anymore.

In order to run, LCAS only needs to be activated on both ends of a VCG. LCAS is transparent for the SDHbackbone point of view. Once both ends of a VCG are configured with LCAS they start exchanging controlinformation in the SDH overhead (namely, in the multi-frame of virtual concatenation).

LCAS can be used as a mechanism to protect transmission of Ethernet traffic : when a part of the VCs of a VCGfail, transmission continues with the remaining operational VCs.

This protection mechanism makes sense only if the VCs of a VCG are not all configured the same way acrossthe SDH network :• Either they must take different path via independent SDH links ;• Or a part of the VCs must be protected at the SDH level (SNC, etc.) ;• Or some of both.

7.2.6.2 - Example of LCAS configuration

We use again the point-to-point connection example described earlier in this document. The VCs just use twodifferent SDH paths. The LCAS option is at “Yes” by default.

Configuring the VCG

Click on the VCG link and then on the “List” link. For the VCG#1 interface, select VC#1 and click on the “MultipleAdd Member” link. In the new screen coming up, select “VC12” as type and VC#6 as last connection. Click on“Apply” in order to create the virtually concatenated group of 6 VC12 (VC12#1 to VC12#6) that will be used totransport Ethernet traffic.



Figure 7-43 : Configuring the VCG (LCAS) (1)

Click on the “Settings” link. Verify that VCG#1 is set with the default configuration: “Admin Status” at “Up”,“LCAS” at “Yes” and “FCS” at “No”. This screen also displays the type of VCG#1 (VC12) and the number ofconstituting VC members (6).

Figure 7-44 : Configuring the VCG (LCAS) (2)

Click on the "Alarms " link. Select interface VCG#1 . Tick option "Monitor " and click on "APPLY " in order tostart monitoring alarms on this port (see Figure 7-9).



Configuring the SDH cross-connects

Click on the “Connection” tap. Configure the connections from VC12#1 to VC12#6 of the GFP150 eXtra card inway where 3 VC12 go through a SDH card and the 3 other VC12 go through a second SDH card. Make sureyou have end-to-end SDH connectivity with the remote ADR2500 eXtra.

Figure 7-45 : Configuring the SDH cross-connects (LCAS)



7.3 - A FEW RULES FOR SET-UP

7.3.1 - Various configuration rules

1. The configuration of the Ethernet interface must be identical between the GFP150 eXtra card and thetransmission equipment present on the LAN. It is preferable to use the “manual” modes rather than the"auto negotiation" mode because of the incompatibility of operation of this mode between certainequipment.

2. The changes of configuration of VCG interface (LCAS, FCS) must be done when the interface is "OFF "(Admin Status ticked "Down"). The interface is configured to "ON " (Admin Status ticked "Up") whenconfigurations of the 2 extremities of the link are effective. However, when LCAS is activated on a VCGinterface and when this interface is itself in the state "ON ", it is possible to modify the VCG composition(add/delete VC members) without putting the interface "OFF " before. In this case, these modifications aredirectly taken into account.

3. For each VCG, it is preferable to configure the FCS parameter to "No ".

7.3.2 - QoS configuration rules

It is necessary to respect the following rules, when configuring the QoS :

1. For each customer Ethernet interface, corresponding CIR and PIR must be under 100Mbit/sec if thisinterface is configured in 100BaseT or in Auto negotiation, or under 10Mbit/sec if this interface is configuredin 10BaseT (corresponding to the Connection Automatic Control feature).

2. For each Ethernet over SDH interface with associated CIR and PIR, the VCG payload must be upper CIR +0.1*(PIR-CIR) (corresponding to the Connection Automatic Control feature).

7.4 - APPLICATIONS

7.4.1 - Meshed networks

In topologies of the type "shared LAN", in multipoint to multipoint (EPLAN or EVPLAN), it is necessary to avoidto create Ethernet loops between 2 GFP150 eXtra cards (site 1 to 2, 2 to 3 and 1 to 3)

- either to avoid to create Ethernet loops by construction of the links, which makes unnecessary theactivation of MSTP- or to activate the "multiple spanning tree " protocol (MSTP).

7.4.2 - Protection of channels

The VC12/VC3 containers used by the GFP150 eXtra card can be protected by SNCP mechanism as all otherVC12/VC3.



7.4.3 - Degraded mode

When a virtual container (VC3 or VC12) used by the GFP150 eXtra card is out of service, transmission foldsback on VC3/VC12 left (thanks to the LCAS protocol, when activated). In these conditions, transmission over aninterface is possible as long as there is at least one VC3 or VC12 available (for this interface).When the VC3/VC12 comes back available, the VCG resynchronize automatically (thanks to the LCAS protocol)and the transmission restarts over all the available VC3/VC12.

7.5 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

7.5.1 - Main characteristics

Main characteristics of the GFP150 eXtra card in the ADR2500 eXtra are :

• Default values of GFP header fields : PFI field (Payload FCS Indicator ) is at 0 (absence of FCS on Payload)

• Permanent values of GFP header fields : PTI field (Payload Type Identifier) is at 000 (Data Client Frame) EXI field (Extension Header Identifier) is at 0000 (Null Extension Header) UPI field (User Payload Identifier) is at 0000 0001 (Frame-Mapped Ethernet)

• Number of VCG per GFP150 eXtra card : 1 to 8

• Number of virtual containers per VCG : from 1 to 46 VC12 (with a limitation to 63 VC12 for the whole VCGs)or from 1 to 2 VC3 (with a limitation of 3 VC3 for the whole VCGs)

• VCG/VC12-nV and VCG/VC3-nV mixity allowed

• Differential delay between VCG containers VC12/VC3 : 47ms maximum for VC12 and 47ms maximum forVC3

• Ethernet interface 10/100BaseT half or full duplex

• MTU is 1548 bytes (including @dest, @src, lgd trame and FCS), which allows to transport the ISL protocol.Frames which length is under 64 bytes are rejected.

• In validated PAUSE mode (Flow control), the PAUSE frames are generated and managed.In no validated PAUSE mode, the received PAUSE frames are thrown and no PAUSE frame is generated.The received PAUSE frames are counted in the InPauseFrame counter but not in the InOctets counter.

• The MAC address table runs in IVL mode (Independent VLAN Learning)

• Ethernet frames with a reserved MAC destination address (01-80-C2-00-00-00 to 01-80-C2-00-00-FF) aretransparently forwarded. It deviates from the IEEE recommendation for Ethernet bridges. However, thisdesign choice ensures continuity of the "client STP" across remote client sites. Naturally, if MSTP isactivated on the ADR2500 eXtra, frames received with the address 01-80-C2-00-00-00 (Mac STP address)on MSTP ports will be transparently forwarded because the MSTP of ADR2500 eXtra uses the Macaddresses 01-80-C2-00-00-04 to 01-80-C2-00-00-04F (by default 01-80-C2-00-00-08) (for more details, see§ 7.2.5.1 -).



7.5.2 - Ethernet rate / VCG rate

The goal of this chapter is to help the user when configuring VCG regarding Ethernet rates on GFP150 eXtracard interfaces.

Concerning Ethernet rates :

• The Ethernet rate configured for each interface of the GFP150 eXtra card is corresponding to the payloadavalaible at the Ethernet interface.

• This rate is called MTU (64 to 1548 bytes including 6 Bytes @dest, 6 Bytes @src, 2 Bytes lgd trame, and 4Bytes FCS).

• Knowing there is 12 intergap Bytes between 2 Ethernet frames, which are outside the payload, and 8preamble Bytes per Ethernet frame, which are also outside the payload, when an Ethernet 100 BaseTinterface is used to the maximum of its capacity (end to end frames at 100Mbit/sec), payload rate in100BaseT is 76.19Mbit/sec for 64 Bytes (MTU) frames, and 98.72Mbit/sec for 1548 Bytes (MTU) frames.

• In the same way, payload rate in 10BaseT is 7.62Mbit/sec for 64 Bytes (MTU) frames, and 9.87Mbit/sec for1548 Bytes (MTU) frames.

• Because we don’t control Ethernet frames lengths in a link, which may change from frame to frame, wehave to imagine the most critical case, in order to configure the VCG rate for the link. Note the GFP protocoladds an 8 Bytes header (12 Bytes when the GFP FCS is ON), header taken into account in§ 7.5.3 -and § 7.5.4 -

Note that even if we know how to configure, in the case of 100BaseT, a CIR upper than 1 and under 100Mbit/sec (per 1Mbit/sec step) at the customer Ethernet interface (and in the case of the 10BaseT mode a CIRbetween 1 and 10Mbit/sec sec (per 1Mbit/sec step)), some normal limitations are to be taken into account :

1. When the active mode is 100BaseT :• The maximum rate is 98.72Mbit/sec, with a limitation to 76.29Mbit/sec for a customer flow including only

64 Bytes length frames, even if the configuration is CIR=100Mbit/sec.• When the VCG is a VC3-2V, the Ethernet rate is limited to 96.27Mbit/sec by taken into account the GFP

header in the VC3-2V payload (VC3-2V payload is 96.768Mbit/sec). It is impossible in this case toobtain an Ethernet rate upper 96Mbit/sec.

2. When the active mode is 10BaseT :• The maximum rate is 9.872Mbit/sec, with a limitation to 7.629Mbit/sec for a customer flow including only

64 Bytes length frames, even if the configuration is CIR=10Mbit/sec.3. In all cases :

• The addition of payload rates of each active VCG must be under the payload of a VC4. So, we canconsider 4 cases :1. No VC3 used (neither for VCG, nor by another card in ADR2500 eXtra) : the number of all VC12

used must be ≤ 63.2. 1 VC3 is used among all the VCG and/or the other cards in ADR2500 eXtra : the number of all

VC12 used must be ≤ 42.3. 2 VC3 are used among all the VCG and/or the other cards in ADR2500 eXtra : the number of all

VC12 used must be ≤ 21.4. 3 VC3 are used among all the VCG and/or the other cards in ADR2500 eXtra : No VC12 can be

used

Of course, if others VC3 and/or VC12 are used for transporting flows coming from other cards inADR2500 eXtra, it must be taken into account.

Note than all VCG VC3 based in the GFP150 eXtra card can’t use more than 2 VC3.



7.5.3 - Number of VC12 in a VCG

VC12 payload is Dvc12=2.176 Mbit/sec.

The maximum number of VC12 allowed per VCG equals 46.

We suppose customer Ethernet interfaces CIR and PIR in the link are already configured.

In point to point (EPLine service), the minimal number N of VC12 necessary for transmitting a CIR of EMbit/sec at the customer Ethernet interface is :

N = UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(E*1.125/Dvc12) and N≤46

This calculation takes into account GFP header with FCS OFF. When FCS is ON, replace 1.125 with 1.1875.

Note that in this case, the customer Ethernet interface remote rate must equals E and we advise to configurePIR=CIR.

Example :

• If we suppose E=PIR=20Mbit/sec• We obtain N=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(20*1.125/2.176)=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(10.34)=11 (≤46)

In all cases, we advise after the configuration of customers interfaces Ethernet CIR/PIR and the correspondingVCG, to configure Ethernet over SDH interfaces CIR/PIR as CIR=PIR=VCG payload.

7.5.4 - Number of VC3 in a VCG

VC3 payload is Dvc3=48.384 Mbit/sec.

The maximum number of VC3 allowed per VCG equals 2.

We suppose customer Ethernet interfaces CIR and PIR in the link are already configured.

In point to point (EPLine service), the minimal number N of VC3 necessary for transmitting a CIR of EMbit/sec at the customer Ethernet interface is :

N = UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(E*1.125/Dvc3) and N≤2

This calculation takes into account GFP header with FCS OFF. When FCS is ON, replace 1.125 with 1.1875.

Note that in this case, the customer Ethernet interface remote rate must equals E and we advise to configurePIR=CIR.

Example :

• If we suppose E=PIR=60Mbit/sec• We obtain N=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(60*1.125/48.384)=UPPER_ROUND_NUMBER(1.395)=2 (≤2)

In all cases, we advise after the configuration of customers interfaces Ethernet CIR/PIR and the correspondingVCG, to configure Ethernet over SDH interfaces CIR/PIR as CIR=PIR=VCG payload.

ANNEX A - CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADDRESSING PLAN

Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page AA-1

A CONSTRUCTION OF AN IP NETWORK ADRESSING PLAN

This appendix provides a brief description of the rules implemented in building a TMN based onan IP protocol stack.

A.1 - PRELIMINARY REMAR KS

The IP protocol stack is used in a data transmission network to transport data in the form ofpackets between two points in the network.

Depending on the ISO model, IP is the network layer protocol. It is therefore in charge, withineach node, of routing the packets so that they can be routed in the network.

The protocols located below the IP correspond to the link and physical layers: these protocolsset up the links between two consecutive nodes in the network.

The protocols "above" the IP (TCP and UDP) are transport layer protocols. These protocols fulfilend-to-end data transmission between two distant points in the network. The protocols basedon the TCP/UDP are application-oriented: they provide services such as file transfer (TFTP onUDP, FTP on TCP), equipment management (SNMP), mail transfer (SMTP), etc.

The figure below describes how the main protocols acting in a network node are stacked.

HTTP serverTo downloading

AutomatonTo operation

functions

IP

TCP

ICMP

ARP MAC PPP

EOCEthernet

OSPFTFTPHTTP SNMP RIP

UDP

Figure A-1 : IP protocol stack

Note: The MAC protocol is attached to the Ethernet physical port (point to multi-point media)and the PPP protocol is attached to the physical ports ensuring the point-to-point links(optical media, microwave, V11,...)


Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Page AA-2- Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

A.2 - IP ADDRESSING

To route packets within a node, the IP uses an addressing mechanism: depending on thedestination address contained in the packet, the IP determines (by scanning its routing table)the nearby router to which it must send the packet and deduces the physical interface on whichthe packet must be sent. The term "router" and "equipment" will be used indifferently in thediscussions which follow.

There are two non-exclusive ways to manage the IP routing tables:

by static routes entered by the operator,

by of a routing daemon (such as RIP, RIP2, OSPF) which dynamically manages the routingtables through the network.

The IP addresses are coded in the form of 4 bytes and are usually represented in decimal form(example: 135.11.33.115). An IP address is divided into 3 fields at most:

«NET» field located to the left,

«subnet» field located at center,

«host» field located to the right.

The length of the first field depends on the class to which the address belongs. The length ofthe "subnet" and "host" fields is defined by a mask associated to the address. There are threeaddress classes:

class A: the «NET» field is coded on the first byte; the three other bytes are reserved for the«SUBNET» and «HOST» fields. The class A addresses vary from 1.0.0.0 to 126.255.255.254 ,

class B: the «NET» field is coded on the first two bytes; the other two bytes are reserved forthe «SUBNET» and «HOST» fields. The class B addresses vary from 128.0.0.0 to191.255.255.254 ,

class C: the «NET» field is coded on the first three bytes; the last byte is reserved for the«SUBNET» and «HOST» fields. The class C addresses vary from 192.0.0.0 to223.255.255.254. ; up to 254 equipment can belong to a single class C IP network (having thesame «NET»).

Note: Addresses beginning by 127 and addresses containing "1" or "0" in the «SUBNET» and«HOST» fields are prohibited.

Note: The IP standard allows that the «SUBNET» and «HOST» fields be coded on a numberof bits which does not correspond to a byte border. In general, this is not implementedfor address readability reasons and since most of the routing daemon (RIP)implementations do not support this function.

The «SUBNET» field is defined by a mask which is written in the form: 255.255.255.0,255.255.0.0, 255.0.0.0, etc: the number of bits at zero in the right hand part of the mask definesthe length of the «HOST» field. Ex: for address 40.2.2.2 associated to mask 255.255.255.0, the«NET» field takes the value 40, the «SUBNET» field takes the value 2.2 and the «HOST» fieldtakes the value 2.



A.3 - ADDRESSING PLAN

A global IP network must be subdivided into N networks each having a "NET" number.

Within each network, each physical link (point-to-point or multipoint) has its own «SUBNET»number.

Each equipment connected to this link (2 for a point-to-point link, N for an Ethernet segment)has its own "HOST" number.

Depending on the number of equipment and links, class A, B and C addresses and«SUBNETs» encoded on one or two types will be used.

To conclude, a pair formed by an IP address and its «SUBNET» mask shall be associated toeach interface of a network node.

A.4 - USE OF STATIC TABL ES

Where static tables are used, each network node must have its routing table completed to allowit to correctly route the packets received.

All IP routes of a routing table for a given equipment comprise the following fields:

«destination @IP»: refers to the IP address of the equipment or sub-network (or evennetwork) to be reached from the given equipment,

«subnet mask»: sub-network mask associated to the IP address defined in «destination@IP» ; all equipment whose IP address part defined by the «1» bits of this field correspondto the same value as the «destination @IP» part defined by this same mask will bereachable via this route,

«next hop @IP»: IP address of next equipment (connected directly with given equipment) towhich the packet will be sent,

«metric» (this can also be understood as "cost" or distance): value from 1 to 15 indicating thenumber of hops to reach the equipment corresponding to the «destination @IP» address. 16corresponds to infinite for the RIP routing daemon. This field is only used by a possiblerouting daemon to choose a preferential route when several routes are available for thesame destination. This field can always be filled in with 1 to simplify if use of the field is notnecessary,

«interf.»: interface number for interface by which next equipment will be reached (whose IPaddress is «next hop @IP»).

Note : When interface IP addresses are declared, implicit static routes are set up to theassociated SUBNETs. It is therefore not necessary to define static routes to join twoequipment belonging to a single SUBNET.

Note: The IP addresses of an equipment are the addresses of its interfaces (or ports)configured. The manager only knows one IP address per equipment. Therefore, the so-called “Equipment IP address” is often the address filled in the manager database. Thisis the address of the port by which the equipment normally dialogues with the manager.

Note: To use an equipment via a PC and an Ethernet interface, the IP address of theoperation PC must be modified so that it belongs to the same SUBNET as the Ethernetinterface used to connect to the network.We recommend that you leave the HOST 1 number free on each subnet, meaning thatyou begin to number the equipment starting with the HOST 2 number. The PC will thenalways take an IP address of the type: NET.SUBNET.1

Note : A default router can be defined (this option is sometimes available) to which all packetswhich cannot be routed by the routing table are transmitted.



The figure below gives an example of an IP network and routing tables associated to two typicalequipment. Note that each port on the on-board routing function corresponds to a differentSUBNET.

Ethernet

140.1.1.2

F2

140.1.0.2 140.1.0.3

Ethernet

F3

F4

F5

140.1.1.4

140.1.1.5NET 140 - 1NET 128.1

Ethernet

NET 160.1

Ethernet

NET 150.1

F8 F9 F10

150.1.1.3 150.1.1.4 150.1.1.5

150.1.1.2

128.1.0.1

F7

F6

150.1.0.3

PPP1 150.1.0.2

128.1.0.2

128.1.0.3

F1

140.1.1.3

Fiber

Fiber Fiber

Manager

Figure A-2 : Example TMN architecture

Configuration of ADR F6

Interfaces

Eth 128.1.0.3Sub-network mask 255.255.0.0

PPP1 150.1.0.2Sub-network mask 255.255.255.0

Other PPP None

Static routes

Dest @IP Subnet mask Next hop Interface Metric Remarks

140.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 128.1.0.2 eth 1 Entire NET 140.1150.1.1.0 255.255.255.0 150.1.0.3 ppp1 1 Entire SUBNET 150.1.1



Configuration of ADR F8Interfaces

Eth 150.1.1.3Sub-network mask 255.255.255.0

Other PPP None

Static routes

Dest @IP Subnet mask Next hop Interface Metric Remarks

128.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 150.1.1.2 eth 2 Entire NET 128.1140.1.0.0 255.255.0.0 150.1.1.2 eth 3 Entire NET 140.1150.1.0.0 255.255.255.0 150.1.1.2 eth 1 Entire SUBNET 150.1.0

A.5 - USE OF RIP ROUTIN G DAEMON

The RIP routing daemon for TCP/IP networks is based on the area and Autonomous System(AS) principles, each having a different «NET» number.

An area contains a set of routers in a single geographical space.

An autonomous system (AS) contains a set of areas organized hierarchically with abackbone area.

The RIP routing daemon periodically distributes all of its routing table. This makes this protocolslower than the «OSPF» protocol. On the other hand, the «RIP» selects its active routes only onthe basis of the number of hops, i.e. the number routers crossed in a «AS» to reach a network.On the other hand, the metric used by the OSPF protocol integrates other parameters.

Each «AS» is a RIP routing domain limited to a distance of 15 hops (max.) between twoequipment exchanging packets within the «AS ». The maximum distance is taken into accountto include the worst case network protection scenario.These «ASs» are separate with respect to each other (within RIP) and connected by isolationnetworks. Each isolation network, formed by a single Ethernet or point-to-point link, has its own«NET» number.

The interfaces used with equipment belonging to an isolation network must be filtered (RIPfiltering option activated on interfaces) to inhibit export of RIP routing table automatic updates.This equipment uses "border" typed interfaces.

Within an "AS", all the equipment must have their RIP routing daemon activated. Within each"AS", each link connecting two equipment is described by a specific «SUBNET» value.Routing from one «AS» to another «AS» via an isolation network is described by static routes.In the example given above, «NET» 128.1 corresponds to an isolation network and «NET»160.1. and 150.1 correspond to «ASs» in which RIP protocols are active.



A.6 - USE OF OSPF ROUT ING DAEMON

The «OSPF» routing daemon for IP networks is based on the same principle as the « RIP »daemon except that the «OSPF» computes the routes using several parameters defined by theadministrator: link rate, cost of communication, number of hops, etc. This protocol also providesfor routing on areas of unlimited size.

Within an autonomous system «AS», the border routers do not distribute all the routes, but onlyroute intervals, thus eliminating the need for a portion of the static routing tables.

ANNEX B - OPTICAL BOOSTER

Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page AB-1

B OPTICAL BOOSTER

B.1 - INSTALLATION

B.1.1 - Access security level

Connectors Function Safety level

Power Access to station power supply SELVLoops Access to dry loops SELVOptical access points Optical access "IN" and "OUT" Class 1 laser

Harmless

Table B-1 – Access security level

Note : The safety level Laser class 1 (compliant to the standard EN 60 825) is got :

- On the one hand, by output power shutdown when the input power is under a defined level(for example fiber breaking) or when the hood for the protection of plugs is opened.

- On the other hand, by a key switch which is authorized user's ownership.

B.1.2 - General information

The amplificateur booster is associated to the U16.2 card of an ADR2500 eXtra in order to supply aregeneration section until 150 km.

This equipment is the subject of a separated Operation Manual "Optical Booster EDFA(Er-Doped Fiber Amplifier)" N° 288 107 383.

It appears as an independent module of 1U height, whose width is adaptable to 19" or ETSI size.Booster depth is compatible with a 300-mm ETSI rack.

This equipment offers :

- one key switch- one input optical access "IN" connected to the U16.2 card and one output optical access

"OUT" connected to the line ; these access points are protected by a hood- one –48 V power supply connector " DC POWER "- one connector with two alarm loops "ALARM PORT"- one LCD display allowing the user to know the operation parameters of the booster ; this

display is associated to three keys of command- one LED indicating the commissioning of the pump laser "POWER"- one operation status LED "NORMAL"- two alarms indicator LEDs "MAJOR" and "MINOR"- an unused connector for RS232 access


Installation and User GuiPage AB-2 Sage

B.1.3 - Installatio

The optical booster can either one is supplied. Th

- a 19" left bra- an ETSI left - a 19" right br- an ETSI righ- a screws and

The mounting kit for instcage nuts and 4 screws,

Check that the unit's posthat, let 1 U between ADR

Connect imperatively to t

No setting or configuratio

B.1.4 - Connectio

B.1.4.1 - Optical

F

DKeys of

command IAlarms

Power supplyconnector

Protectionhood.Fibersaccess

Keyswitch ofthe pumplaser

de - 288 11m Commun

Figure B-1

n

be installedis kit conta

cketbracketackett bracket flat washe

allation of tis not supp

ition in the 2500 eXtr

he rack the

n is neede

n of ac

ports

igure B-2 –

loops

Statusand

alarmsLEDs

3 969-01ication docu

– Optica

in a 19"ins :

rs kit

he equipmlied with t

rack doesa and boo

pin groun

d on the e

cess p

Optical

LCDisplay

ment. Reproduction and disclo

l booster – Installation

or ETSI rack. A mounti

ent on the uprights of thhe equipment

not prevent heat dissipaster.

d located at the rear of t

quipment. All the parame

oints

booster – Optical acces

RS232nterface

Pump laserstatus LED

sure prohibited

in rack

ng kit to adapt the equipment to

e 19" or ETSI rack, formed by 4

tion from other equipment ; to do

he equipment.

ters have been set in factory.

s points



The booster offers one input optical access "IN" and one output optical access "OUT", onoptical fiber compliant to the ITU-T G652 recommendation.

Open the hood and connect the output optical cable of the ADR2500 eXtra on the SC/PCconnection "IN" of the booster and the output optical cable of the booster "OUT" to the line.

Remark : opening the hood leads to an optical output shutdown, however, it is preferable tomake these connections without powered booster.

B.1.4.2 - Power port

The optical booster can be powered either by a PAPA or by all other power supply sources.

9-way HE5 male connector

65

91

Pin N° Signal name

1 -48V16 OB1

2 -48V17 OB1

3 Reserved8 OB2

4 -48V29 OB2

5 -48V2

NOTA : The shielding of the connector is connected to the equipment ground

Power supply interface :

Input voltage : Two - 48 V power supply sources, TBTS type (Safety extra lowvoltage)

Operating voltage range : - 36 V to - 60 V

Maximum voltage range : - 36 V to - 72 V

Power : 20 W max.


Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Page AB-4 Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

B.1.4.3 - Alarm loops

Two dry loops outputs (Common, Set, Reset) used as station alarmThese loops can be collected by the ADR2500 eXtra via the CCU card ("LOOPS" access points)

HE5 - 15 pins Female Connector

9158 1

Pin N° Signal name

1 Reserved9 Reserved



4 Reserved12 Minor R

5 Reserved13 Minor C

6 Minor S14 Major R

7 Reserved15 Major C

8 Major S

B.2 - OPERATION

B.2.1 - General information

The equipment commissioning is realized by the switch key located on the front panel ; this key can beremoved either on the "ON" or "OFF" position.

The equipment monitoring is performed by :

- one LCD display controlled by three push buttons- one LED indicating the commissioning of the pump laser " POWER " (green)- one indicator LED indicating the equipment status "NORMAL" (green)- two alarms indicator LEDs "MAJOR" (red) and "MINOR" (red)- two alarm loops

B.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation

It is possible to realize a maintenance operation by looping booster on ADR2500 eXtra reception via anoptical attenuator.

This operation allows local test of ADR2500 eXtra on booster.



The optical attenuator value must be set such as ADR2500 eXtra received power is compliant with theU16.2 card specification.

B.2.3 - Display and directions for use

By pressure on the right keys, the LCD display allows to acceed to two dropdown menus :

1 - "ALARM MENU" (default displayed menu) :- failures indications- operating parameters of booster :

- current and temperature of pump laser- equipment temperature- status of DC power supply- input and output powers

2 - "MAIN MENU" : set up menu which does not be used.

B.2.4 - Alarm processing

The following table indicates the display, the activation of LEDs, alarm loops and APR (AutomaticPower Reduction) associated to each failure.

Failure indication LCD Display "POWER"LED

"NORMAL"LED

"MAJOR""MINOR"LEDs

"MAJOR""MINOR"Loops

Consequent

action

No failure "NO ALARM" Green Green Off Opened

No power supply Off Off Off Off MAJORand MINOR

Power supply failure "DC 48VX FAIL" Green Off MAJOR MAJOR

Opened fiber hood "NO ALARM" Red Green Off Opened APR

Input power underthreshold "INPUT POWER LOW" Red Off MAJOR MAJOR APR

Input power overthreshold "INPUT POWER HI" Green Off MAJOR MAJOR

Output power out oflimits

"OUTPUT POWER LOW""OUTPUT POWER HI"

Green Off MAJOR MAJOR

Internal temperatureout of limits

"ENV TEMP OVER LIMITS" Green Off MINOR MINOR

Laser temperature outof limits

"LD1 TEMP OVER " Green Off MINOR MINOR

Laser current out oflimits

"LD1 BIAS OVER" Green Off MINOR MINOR

Table B-2 – Failure indication definition



B.3 - SPARE PART AND CABLES

Mnemonic Designation Code n°

Optical booster OPTICAL BOOSTER +14 DBM 251 125 832

Table B-3 – List of items

Designation Length Code n°

LOOPS – Alarm loops

(1/2 cable)

2,5 m

12 m

6 013 628

6 013 161

POWER – (1/2 cable)

- (PAPA)

3 m

3 m

251 065 817

55 670 797

IN or OUT – Optical jumper

SC-PC/SC-PC

1,5 m

2,5 m

3,4 m

4,6 m

5,8 m

7 m

8,2 m

9,4 m

12 m

15 m

20 m

251 035 872

251 035 880

251 035 893

251 036 209

251 036 212

251 036 220

251 036 233

251 036 241

251 036 251

251 036 262

251 036 275

Table B-4 – List of available cables



B.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT

Optical characteristics

Wavelength range 1530 nm to 1565 nmOperating input range -5 to +5 dBmSaturated output power +14 to +17 dBmNoise figure 6 dB max


Height 1UWidth 19" or ETSIDepth Compatible with a 300 mm ETSI rackWeight > 5 kgProtection Index (PI) Corresponds to PI of used rack

Consumption

Equipment < 20 W


Mechanical (transport) ETS 300 019-2-2Mechanical (operation) ETS 300 019-2-3Climatic conditions ETS 300 019Operating temperature - 5 °C to + 50°CTransport and storage temperature - 20°C to + 75°CRelative humidity (storage) 5% to 95%Electrical ETS 300 386-2 of September 1999Interference voltage (radioelectricfrequency emissions)

NF EN 55022

Safety NF EN 60950, EN 60825Power ETS 300 132-2 (equipment is TBTS)

Predicted reliability

Equipment ≤ 5 10-6 at 40°C

Table B-5 – Technical characteristics

ANNEX C - MUX 10000 A/T

Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited Page AC-1

C MUX 10000 A/T

C.1 - INSTALLATION

C.1.1 - General information

Two MUX 10000 are proposed : a MUX 10000A and a MUX 10000T ; the MUX A is a doubleequipment of the MUX T and so realizes the MUX T function twice.

The MUX 10000T is associated to an terminal node (terminal ADR2500 eXtra).The MUX 10000A is associated to an add/drop node (add/drop ADR2500 eXtra).

The MUX 10000T realizes the optical multiplexing – demultiplexing of four wavelengths included in theC band and spaced of 1,6 nm (200 GHz). This MUX 10000T is associated with ADR2500 eXtraequipment which supply the four optical STM-16 signals from L16.2+ cards.

The four wavelengths values are :- 1547,72 nm ± 0,1- 1549,32 nm ± 0,1- 1550,92 nm ± 0,1- 1552,52 nm ± 0,1

This function is described by the following synoptic :

Figure C-1 - MUX10000T Block diagram (1/2 MUX 10000A)

This equipment is made up of passive components, therefore no external power supply isneeded.

Opt

ical

line

OUT 1547,72nm

OUT 1549,32 nm

OUT1550.92 nm

OUT 1552.52 nmMUX 10000T

OUT MUX IN MUX

IN 1547,72nm

IN 1549,32 nm

IN1550.92 nm

IN 1552.52 nm

ANNEXC - MUX 10000A/T

Installation and User Guide - 288 113 969-01Page AC-2 Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibited

This equipment appears as an independent module of 1U height, whose width is adaptable to19" or ETSI size.

All the MUX 10000T access points are SC/PC optical and are located on front panel.

Figure C-1 block diagram and figure C-2 front panel show the MUX 10000T access points :

- 4 multiplexer optical inputs IN 1547,72, IN 1549,32, IN 1550,92 and IN 1552,52 which areconnected to optical emissions of four L16.2+ cards, each one with the right wavelength.

- 4 demultiplexer optical outputs OUT 1547,72, OUT 1549,32, OUT 1550,92 and OUT1552,52 which are connected to optical receptions of four L16.2+ cards.

- 1 output OUT MUX which corresponds to the multiplexer output and offers up to 4wavelengths, each one supporting a STM-16 signal

- 1 input IN MUX which corresponds to the demultiplexer input and offers up to 4wavelengths, each one supporting a STM-16 signal

Figure C-2 – MUX 10000 T – Front panel

The MUX 10000T description applies also to the MUX 10000A ; this one contains, in the samemechanism, two MUX 10000T functions. So, the MUX 10000A front panel presents the sameconnectors access points twice.

Figure C-3 – MUX 10000 A – Front panel

C.1.2 - Installation

Figure C-4 – MUX 10000 A – Installation in 19" rack

S MUX 10000T

1547.72 1549.32 1550.92 1552.52OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN

OUT INMUX

S MUX 10000A

1547.72 1549.32 1550.92 1552.52OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT IN

OUT IN OUT IN

OUT IN OUT INOUT INOUT IN1547.72 1549.32 1550.92 1552.52

MUX1 MUX2



According to the MUX 10000 location (19" or ETSI rack), there are specific fixation organs :

- two 19" brackets- two ETSI brackets- a screws and flat washers kit, already joined with the unit

The mounting kit for installation of the unit on the uprights of the 19" or ETSI rack, formed by 4cage nuts and 4 screws, is not supplied with the equipment

Check that the unit's position in the rack does not prevent heat dissipation from otherequipment ; to do that, let 1 U between ADR2500 eXtra and MUX 10000.

No setting or configuration is needed on the equipment.

C.1.3 - Connection of access points

Figure C-5 – MUX 10000 A or T – Optical access points

All access points are located on equipment front panel

Connections :

- Connect the optical output cables of the ADR2500 eXtra to the SC/PC connections IN1547,72, IN 1549,32, IN 1550,92 and IN 1552,52 of the MUX 10000 (lower front platelocation)

- Connect the optical input cables of the ADR2500 eXtra to the SC/PC connections OUT1547,72, OUT 1549,32, OUT 1550,92 and OUT 1552,52 of the MUX 10000 (lower frontplate location)

- Connect the optical output OUT MUX and input IN MUX cables of the MUX 10000 (uperfront plate location) towards the optical line.

C.2 - OPERATION

C.2.1 - General information

The equipment commissioning is realized by connection of optical cables on the associatedequipment and line.



C.2.2 - Maintenance command and operation

It is possible to realize a maintenance operation by looping output OUT MUX of the MUX10000 on its input IN MUX, via an optical attenuator.

This operation allows local test of ADR2500 eXtra on MUX 10000.

The optical attenuator value must be set so that the ADR2500 eXtra received power iscompliant to the L16.2+ card receiver specification.

C.2.3 - Multiplexing – demultiplexing function specification

The following table gives technical specification of the multiplexing – demultiplexing function.

Parameters Units Values RemarksOperating CenterWavelength nm 1547,72 / 1549,32 / 1550,92 /

1552,52Tolerance in relation to theCenter Wavelength nm (Max) ± 0,1

Channel Spacing nm 1,6 200 GHzPassband Width nm(Min.) 0,8 (± 0,4) at –0,5dB

MUX 2.0Insertion loss DEMUX dB(Max.) 2.0Passband Ripple dB(Max.) 0,5

Channel Uniformity dB (Max.) 1

Isolation dB (Min.) 30 AdjacentChannels

Isolation dB (Min.) 40 Non-AdjacentChannels

Directivity dB (Min.) 45Return Loss dB (Min.) 45PDL dB (Max.) 0,2PMD ps (max.) 0,2Thermal stability dB/°C (max.) 0,005

Thermal Wavelength Drift nm/°C (max.) 0,002

Operating Temperature °C 0 to + 70Storage Temperature °C - 20 to + 70

Package Dimension mm 88 X 58 X 6,6 L x W x D

Table C-1 - MUX/DEMUX Specification



C.2.4 - Optical power budget

Charactéristics ValuesWavelengths (nm) 1547,72/1549,32/

1550,92/1552,52

Agregate rate (Mbit/s) 9953,28 ±20 ppm(4x2488,32)

Code Uncoded (NRZ)Budget without externalattenuator (*)

13 to 21 dB

Mean launched power at S pointon each optical multiplexer input(**)

+1 to +5 dBm

Receiver sensitivity at R point - 28 dBmReceiver overload at R point - 8 dBmConnector SC/PC

Table C-2 – Optical power budget

(*) In case of short optical line, an external optical attenuator is required to obtain an attenuationbetween 13 dB and 21 dB. This attenuator is put at emission side on the output OUT MUX.

(**) Foresee optical 6 dB for the Add-Drop function

C.3 - SPARE PARTS AND CABLES

Designation Code n°

MUX 10000 T 251 156 410

MUX 10000 A 251 163 949

Table C-3 – List of items



Designation Length Code n°

IN or OUT – Optical jumper

SC-PC/SC-PC

1,5 m

2,5 m

3,4 m

4,6 m

5,8 m

7 m

8,2 m

9,4 m

12 m

15 m

20 m

251 035 872

251 035 880

251 035 893

251 036 209

251 036 212

251 036 220

251 036 233

251 036 241

251 036 251

251 036 262

251 036 275

Table C-4 – List of available cables

C.4 - TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS

EQUIPMENT


Height 1UWidth 19" or ETSIDepth < 300 mmWeight < 3 kgProtection index (PI) Corresponds to Pi of used rack


Mechanical (transport) IEC 68-2-36 and IEC 68-2-29Mechanical (operation) IEC 68-2-27Climatic conditions ETS 300 019Operating temperature - 5 °C to + 45°CTransport and storage temperature - 20°C to + 70°CRelative humidity (storage) < 95%

Predicted reliability *

Equipment MUX T : 3,4 10-6 MUX A : 6,8 10-6

Table C-5 – Technical Characteristics

Installation and User Guide / Guide d'Installation et d'Utilisation – 288 113 969-01Sagem Communication document. Reproduction and disclosure prohibitedDocument Sagem Communication. Reproduction et divulgation interdites

En cas de difficultés rencontrées lors de l'installation ou de l'utilisation, n'hésitez pas à :

If you encounter problems during installation or use, do not hesitate to:

CONTACTER NOTRE HOTLINE "PRODUITS SDH"CONTACT OUR "SDH PRODUCTS" HOTLINE

UN SEUL NUMERO DE TELEPHONE :ON A SINGLE TELEPHONE NUMBER:

en France métropolitaine/in mainland France : 01 40 70 60 60ou depuis l'étranger/or from abroad : 33 1 40 70 60 60

UN SEUL NUMERO DE FAX :ON A SINGLE FAX NUMBER:

en France métropolitaine/in mainland France : 01 40 70 60 80ou depuis l'étranger/or from abroad : 33 1 40 70 60 80

UN SEUL Email :ON A SINGLE Email address:

[email protected]

N'oubliez pas de vous munir de votre numéro de client qui estinscrit sur votre facture.Don't forget to provide yourself with your customer numberwhich is written on your invoice.

Siège social : 27, rue Leblanc - 75512 PARIS CEDEX 15 - FRANCETél. : +33 1 58 11 77 00 - Fax : +33 1 58 11 77 50http://www.sagem.com

Société Anonyme au capital de 300 272 000 € - 480 108 158 RCS Paris

288113969-01gb adr2500extra

Documents